JP7245487B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing a display effect using a display device when a game ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, display effects using character images, patterns, and the like can be performed.

JP 2016-29956 A

However, even with the gaming machines described above, there is still room for improvement in terms of techniques for enhancing the interest in games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following application examples. In addition, the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of pending icons and decorative patterns,
one of the first display and the second display can be displayed in each display area where each pending icon is displayed;
In the display area where the first display is displayed, the hold icon can be displayed on the first image ,
In the display area where the second display is displayed, the holding icon becomes invisible due to a second image different from the decorative pattern,
After the holding icon is displayed in a normal manner without prefetching effects in each of the plurality of display areas where the first display is displayed, one of the plurality of display areas is displayed. When the display is switched from the first display to the second display, the outer shapes of the first image and the pending icon are both deformed and displayed, and then the second image changes the pending icon. becomes invisible and the first display is continuously displayed in other display regions of the plurality of display regions;
After the first effect, the display of the display area switched to the second display is switched from the second display to the first display, and a special mode in which the invisible pending icon is prefetched. and a second effect that is displayed again as .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine; FIG. It is an enlarged view of display devices. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM; FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining determination tables T1 to T4; It is explanatory drawing of jackpot classification determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-work-time-saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a time saving state. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9; 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 prior determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 prior determination processing. 4 is a flowchart of normal operation processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of big hit determination processing. It is the 1st flow chart of fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is the second flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of game state reset processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessary product processing. 4 is a flowchart of V opening/closing member operation processing; It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. 9 is a flowchart of V-region sensor detection processing; It is a flow chart of the number of pending ball processing. 4 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the look-ahead effect determination process. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a prior determination information storage area; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51; It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of basic production|presentation pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of chance up production|presentation pattern determination table T53. It is a flow chart of processing in the middle of fluctuation production. 4 is a flowchart of display control processing; It is a figure for demonstrating the operation|movement of a movable accessory. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a button image action effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a button image action effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a button image action effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an effect A for partially enlarged display of an operation part; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining operation portion partial enlargement display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation portion partial enlargement display effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation portion image protrusion movement effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation portion image protrusion movement effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation portion image protrusion movement effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation section image protrusion movement effect D; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation section image protrusion display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation portion image overflow display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation section image protrusion display effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon/operation unit image movement effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon/operation unit image movement effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon/operation unit image movement effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon/operation unit image movement effect D; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon/operation unit image superimposition effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon/operation unit image superimposition effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon/operation unit image superimposition effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon non-display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon non-display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon non-display effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation count effect A; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating operation count production B (success). It is a figure for demonstrating the operation count effect|presentation B (failure). FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer image movement effect A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a timer image movement effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer image movement effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer image tilt display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer image tilt display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer image tilt display effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining timer button effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer button effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer pseudo-continuous effect A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a timer pseudo-continuous effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending change effect A; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a pending change effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending change effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the winning ball number display effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a payout display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a payout display effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a prize-winning image/character image superimposition effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a winning image/character image superimposed effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a winning image/character image superimposed effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a button-image meter effect A; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a button image inside meter effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an in-button-image display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an intra-button-image display effect B; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the multiple variation production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the multiple fluctuation|variation production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the multiple fluctuation production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation charge production|presentation A (success). It is a figure for demonstrating operation charge production|presentation A (failure). It is a figure for demonstrating the operation charge production|presentation B. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pseudo consecutive point effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pseudo consecutive point effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer freeze effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer freeze effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer freeze effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a chance-up meter effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a chance-up meter effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a chance-up meter effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending timer effect A; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a pending timer effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending timer effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating the timer ball-out acquisition production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer ball-out acquisition production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer ball-out acquisition production C. FIG.

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 corresponds to the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1 . Further, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the rearward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player to the gaming machine 1 .

The game machine 1 is a pachinko game machine that shoots game balls based on a player's shooting operation, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning when the game balls win in a specific winning device. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached inside the game machine frame 50.例文帳に追加The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer shell of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have it. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame. ) 62 , an effect button 63 , a sword member 64 , a sword button 65 , a frame lamp 66 , a speaker 67 and a frame movable body 600 . An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and shoots the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. A surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 61 . The production button 63 is an operation unit arranged near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production performed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation part in the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, at the end of the hilt of the sword, and is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. be. The sword member 64 is configured to be able to perform two different operations: a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward, and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and performs light emission effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right sides of the front frame 53, and produce sound during a game or the like. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper portion of the front frame 53 . The frame movable body 600 is configured to be displaceable from a retracted state in which it is stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state in which it protrudes upward from the front frame 53 .

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration 10, a fixed winning device (navel) 19, and a normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22. , a gate (through chucker) 28, a first big prize winning device (first attacker) 31, a second big prize winning device (second attacker) 36, a normal prize winning port 27, an out port 16, and displays. 40 and .

The game area 3 is an area where the game ball shot by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game pegs for guiding the game ball are protruded. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball shot by operating the handle 60 upwards of the game area 3 . The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3 .

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a production pattern display area in which production patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display) and a reserved image display in which reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed. and a pending digested image display region in which the pending digested image 9C is displayed. The pending images 9A and 9B are images representing pending, and are also called pending icons or first pending icons. The pending digest image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also called the pending icon or the second pending icon. The first pending icon and the second pending icon are collectively referred to simply as pending icons.

The performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". A left effect pattern (left decorative pattern) 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A medium effect pattern (middle decorative pattern) 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of patterns representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays the first special symbol and the The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a jackpot is won, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with double numbers such as "777". In the case of a miss, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with a loose pattern such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b. The position of the pattern display area may not be fixed. Moreover, as a mode of the variable display of the effect symbols, a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction may be used, or a mode other than that may be used. It is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set as to what combination of performance symbols to stop display according to each lottery result. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as "effect symbol variation effect", "decorative symbol variation effect", or simply "variation effect". In this decorative pattern variation performance, the performance in the period from when the special pattern starts to stop until it stops (also called a special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation performance (one cycle of variation performance). Therefore, even if there is a case in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbols start to fluctuate until they stop, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the variable performance of the decorative symbols.

The image display device 7 can display, on the display screen 7a, a big win performance performed in parallel with a big win game (an example of a special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc., in addition to the performance symbol variation performance. In the production design variation production, production images such as a background image and a character image may be displayed in addition to the production design. In addition to the effect pattern, the image display device 7 also provides an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can suggest that the special pattern is changing, or that the special pattern lottery result can be suggested. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth pattern) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3 .

The reserved image display area is a first reserved display area that displays a reserved image 9A according to the number of memories of the first special figure reservation described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of memories of the second special figure reservation that will be described later. and a second reserved display area. By the display of the pending images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special figure suspension displayed on the first special figure suspension display 43a described later, and the second special figure suspension displayed on the second special figure suspension display 43b can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays a pending digest image 9C. The reserved digested image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) that are currently changing on the display screen 7a, and depending on the display of the suspended digested image 9C, the first special figure suspension or the second special figure suspension It is possible to display in an easy-to-understand manner for the player that is digested ("digestion of special figure reservation" described later).

The center decorative body 10 is arranged near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 . A movable board body 15 (also referred to as a movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is attached to the center decorative body 10.例文帳に追加A stage portion 11 is formed below the center decorative body 10 . The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to a first starting port 20 which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided on the lower left side of the center decorative body 10 . The warp part 12 has an entrance part into which game balls flow in and an exit part from which game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance part flow out to the stage part 11 from the exit part.

A fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is a first start opening (first start winning opening, first ball entry opening) in which the ease with which a game ball enters is always unchanged. port, fixed starting port) 20. Winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 triggers a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is a trigger for the acquisition of the jackpot random number and the like and the jackpot determination and the like.

A normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and has a second starting port (second starting winning port, second ball entrance, variable starting port) 21. ing. Winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 triggers a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 has a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21 , and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23 . The movable member 23 is driven by an electric tuning solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It is sufficient for the electric chew 22 to enter the second starting port 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball into.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers acquisition of a normal symbol random number (hit random number), hit determination, and the like.

Here, the "lottery of special symbols" means that when a game ball wins in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, a random number for special symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is determined in advance. It is a process of determining whether or not a big win is made by comparing with the value corresponding to the "big win". The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the variable display of special symbols is performed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, and the predetermined variation is performed. When the time elapses, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game for variably displaying performance patterns is performed in synchronism with the variable display of the special patterns, and the result of the lottery of the big win is reported to the player more effectively by the pattern matching game.

In addition, the ``lottery of normal symbols'' means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for normal symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means the process of judging whether or not it is a hit. As for the lottery result of this normal pattern, the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the lottery result is not immediately reported, but the normal pattern is displayed in a normal pattern display device 42 to be described later, and the predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time elapses, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is fixedly displayed (lighted or extinguished), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged above the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and the first big winning port (first special winning port) 30 and , a V region 39 , a non-V region 70 , and a V opening/closing member 71 . The first big prize winning opening 30 is provided with an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that permits or inhibits reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first grand prize winning solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The first big prize winning device 31 has a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). , a first prize winning hole sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specified area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specified area) 70 are configured as areas inside the first big winning device 31 through which game balls that have passed through the first big winning hole 30 can pass. . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 and detects the winning of the game ball into the first big winning hole 30 . The V area sensor 39 a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 . The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to release the game ball. A first state (rotating state) in which the ball is distributed to the V area 39 is entered, and a second state (stopped state) in which the game ball is positioned at the origin and distributed to the non-V area 70 is entered when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. . In addition, the V opening and closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. For example, It may be configured to move in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board 2 . That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it becomes a retracted state (first state) in which game balls are distributed to the V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in an advanced state in which game balls are distributed to the non-V area 70. (Second state). In the gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the V area 39 triggers a transition to a high probability state, which will be described later. That is, the V region 39 is a variable probability operating port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a variable probability operating port. The first big winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first big winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big winning device 31 . The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged above the first big winning port 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning port (second special winning port) 35 It has The second big prize winning opening 35 includes an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second prize winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state.

The normal winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3 . It should be noted that the number of normal winning openings 27 can be set arbitrarily. The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges out of the game area 3 game balls that have not won any prize winning openings. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2 . The details of the display devices 40 will be described later.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the hitting method of shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called "right hitting". In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning the first start hole 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to aim to pass through the gate 28 and to win the second starting hole 21, the first big winning hole 30, and the second big winning hole 35 by hitting to the right.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the indicators 40. As shown in FIG. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display device 43b. , and a normal map holding display 44 . The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a displays the number of memory of operation reservation (1st special figure reservation) of the 1st special design indicator 41a. The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of memory of the operation reservation (2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special design indicator 41b. The normal pattern holding display 44 displays the number of memory of operation holding (normal pattern holding) of the normal pattern display 42 . The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20. - 特許庁The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 as a trigger. Below, the 1st special design and the 2nd special design are named generically, and it is also called a "special design." Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display device 41". In addition, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display 43".

The special symbol display device 41 variably displays (variable display) the special symbol (identification information), and then displays it in a stopped state, so that a lottery (lottery per special symbol) based on winning the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 is displayed. , jackpot lottery) results. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed (a stop symbol, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop pattern is a special pattern (jackpot pattern) of a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first big prize winning port 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped jackpot pattern (type of jackpot won). Alternatively, a special game (jackpot game) for opening the second big winning hole 35 is performed. The opening patterns of the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display device 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described later), you can say ``○○●●○○●●'' (○: lit, ●: unlit). , 5th and 6th LEDs light up to display the jackpot symbols. If the game is lost, a lost pattern is displayed in which only the rightmost LED lights up, such as "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the lost pattern. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are variably displayed (variably displayed) for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, each LED may light so that the light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of variable display is not limited to the above mode, but can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all LEDs may blink simultaneously in the variable display mode.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (enters a ball), the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the win are , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if it is a prize to the first start port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as a first special figure reservation, and if it is a prize to the second start port 21 , is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are four. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is consumed when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Digestion of special figure reservation" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation and execute variable display of special symbols for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. Even if a prize is won during execution of a special game, the right of a jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 43 . The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a and the 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b are each constituted by four LEDs, for example. Each special figure reservation indicator 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by turning on LEDs corresponding to the number of special figure reservations.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28 as a trigger. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stopping the display. A normal pattern to be stopped and displayed (a normal pattern stop pattern, a normal pattern derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal pattern selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stop pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (a normal pattern of a predetermined stop mode, ie, a normal winning pattern), an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal winning pattern with both LEDs lit is displayed, such as "○○" (○: lit, ●: unlit). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal losing pattern in which only the right LED lights up is displayed, such as "●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the normal losing pattern. Before the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the normal symbols are varied and displayed for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, both LEDs may alternately light up. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode, and can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not stopped (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously in the aspect of the variable display.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 5) as a normal pattern reservation. memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. The digestion of the normal pattern reservation means that the normal design random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal pattern reservation is determined, and the normal design variable display is performed to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game, a prize is won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of normal map reservations is displayed on the normal map reservation display 44 . The normal map hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal map reserves by lighting the LEDs by the number of normal map reserves.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and an audio control board 106 ( 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls effects executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control section together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. It should be noted that the sub-control section can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90 .

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87 . The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88 . The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first big winning opening sensor 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, and the V area. Sensor 39a, non-V area sensor 70a, and normal winning opening sensor 27a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric tuning solenoid 24, the first big winning opening solenoid 33, the second big winning opening solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The first starting hole sensor 20 a is provided inside the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 20 . The second starting hole sensor 21 a is provided inside the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 21 . The gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28 . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has won the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35 a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second big winning hole 35 . The V area sensor 39 a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70 . The normal winning hole sensor 27 a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the normal winning hole 27 . The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22 . The first big winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31 . The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31 .

The display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, a second special symbol reservation display device 43b, and a general design reservation. Display control for the display device 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120 , a rental ball payout device 130 and a card unit 135 , and is connected with a launcher 112 via a launch control circuit 111 . The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the prize balls. Prize balls to be dispensed are detected by a prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball dispensing device 130 discharges the rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the rented ball motor 131 of the rented ball payout device 130 based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out the rented balls. The rented balls to be paid out are detected by a rented ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card. Firing device 112 includes handle 60 ( FIG. 1 ), firing motor 113 , touch switch 114 and firing volume 115 . When the player operates the handle 60 , the shooting device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the shooting volume 115 . Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 .

A sub control board 90 ( FIG. 4 ) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95 . The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the game effect of the game machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub ROM 93 for storing programs and the like for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub ROM 93 for executing the programs stored in the sub ROM 94. and a CPU 92 . Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91 . An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and performs display control of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102 , a ROM 103 and a RAM 104 . In the ROM 103, in addition to programs for performing display control, still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, graphics, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. ) and image data such as background images are stored. A RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data. The CPU 102 executes programs stored in the ROM 103 . The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106 , and based on commands received from the main control board 80 , the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sounds, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 . and so on. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 . Note that the audio control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute audio control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be implemented with a ROM, and the audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to perform voice control. Furthermore, the sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100. FIG.

The frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, and the board movable body 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . In other words, the production control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and creates light emission patterns. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The production control microcomputer 91 operates the board movable body 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The board movable body 15 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the center decorative body 10 . The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (driving data) that determines the operation mode of the board movable body 15, and controls the operation of the board movable body 15 according to the operation pattern data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the CPU may control the lighting of the lamp and the operation control of the movable board 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns.

An effect button detection switch 63 a and a frame movable body 600 are connected to the relay board 108 . The production button detection switch 63a detects that the production button 63 (FIG. 1) is pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. FIG. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper portion of the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The effect control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (driving data) that determines the motion mode of the frame movable body 600, and controls the motion of the frame movable body 600 according to the motion pattern data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The relay board 108 includes a select button detection switch that detects that the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is pressed down, a touch sensor that is provided on the front frame 53 and outputs a detection signal when a human body touches it, and the like. may be connected.

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining the table stored in the sub ROM 93. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94. As shown in FIG.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) contains a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. A judgment table T6, an electric chew opening pattern judgment table T7, a big winning opening pattern judgment table T8, and a V opening/closing member opening pattern judgment table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special figure pending storage area 85, and a normal figure pending storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command to be output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side is set in the main control main processing (described later), and is a pre-determining command, a pending pitch command, A variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the game state are set in the main control main process (described later), and the jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first prize flag, second prize flag, A V flag, a variable probability flag, a time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control main process (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a variable probability counter, a time saving counter and the like are set. The special action status set area 84d is an area in which a status is set for special action processing, which will be described later. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storing. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first for storing the random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the second special figure reservation A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The general pattern reservation storage area 86 stores a random number group (reservation information) such as normal pattern random numbers (per random numbers) corresponding to the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th general pattern reservations. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. In the main RAM 84, in addition to the above areas, a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the board movable body 15 and frame movable body 600 are set. A data buffer and the like are provided.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a basic effect pattern determination table T52, a chance up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a prior determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later). A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area ( It is an output buffer), and a variable production start command, a command before the end of fluctuation, a variable production end command, an opening production start command, a round production start command, an ending production start command, etc. are set. The prior determination information storage area 94c stores prior determination information in a sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area where the counters used in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, such as a random number counter, a first special figure pending effect counter, a second special figure pending effect counter, a general figure pending effect counter. , Probability variation production counter, time saving production counter, etc. are set.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 7A shows random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control section side, and FIG. 7B shows random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control section side. there is The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "jackpot random number", a "jackpot type random number", a "reach random number", a "fluctuation pattern random number", and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at the timing described later. is configured as The “jackpot random number” is a random number used for lottery (jackpot determination) to determine whether or not a jackpot will be won, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 65,535. The “jackpot type random number” is a random number used for the lottery (jackpot type determination) of the type of the winning jackpot, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. "Reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect symbol variation effect that indicates the result when the big hit determination is a loss, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. take. Reach is a state in which only one of the plurality of production patterns (decorative patterns) that is displayed in a variable manner remains, and it depends on which design the variable display design is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, the state of "7↓7") that is a combination of performance symbols indicating a jackpot winning. In addition, the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if it is shaking within the display screen 7a. “Variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 . The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0-255. The "jackpot random number", "jackpot type random number", "reach random number", and "fluctuation pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). The random value group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random value group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is acquired based on passing through the gate 28 . The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86 .

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "read-ahead effect random number" and a "chance-up random number" at timings described later. The “read-ahead effect random number” is a random number used for determining the look-ahead effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The “chance-up random number” is a random number used for determining the chance-up effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The "read-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a pre-determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94 . The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the output of a variation start command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94 .

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (one of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "loss". It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8 (A), in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 164", it is determined to be a "jackpot", and the jackpot random value is a number other than "0 to 164 (165 to 65535 )” is determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 649", it is determined as a "jackpot", and if the jackpot random value is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)" is determined to be "losing". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains a reach random number (any of 0 to 127) in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". This table is referenced to determine whether In FIG. 8 (B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 13", it is determined to be "with reach", and the reach random value is a number other than "0 to 13 (14 to 127)” is determined to be “no reach”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the reach random number is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is reach, and if the reach random number is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)" is determined to be "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-working time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the reach at the time of loss is less likely to be applied in the time saving state than in the non-working time saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure pending by selecting more reach no loss with short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random number value (one of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "win" or "loss". This table is referenced to determine whether to In FIG. 8 (C), in the "non-time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 2", it is determined to be "hit", and the normal symbol random number is a number other than "0 to 2 (3 ~ 255)” is determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 254", it is determined to be "hit", and if the normal symbol random number is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)" , is determined as “losing”.

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This table is referenced to In FIG. 8 (D), when the "non-time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "30 seconds", and when the "time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "1 second". is shown.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), according to the jackpot type random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired, "jack type" and "special symbol It is a table referred to in order to determine "type". In FIG. 9, when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 1 stop design (special stop design) is determined as "jackpot design 1". When the jackpot type random value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop design is determined as "jackpot design 2". When the jackpot type random value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (real 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined as "jackpot symbol 5". On the other hand, if you win the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2), regardless of the jackpot type random number (any of 0 to 127), the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". It is shown that the stop pattern of special figure 2 (special figure stop design) is determined to be "jackpot design 1". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, special game "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", "ending (ED) command" can also be specified. For the specific contents of "16RV planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V planned passage jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passage planned jackpot" will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the time saving state. Variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to for determining a variation pattern according to the variation pattern random number value (0 to 127) acquired in main control main processing (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. . In FIG. 10, for example, the first start port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, it is determined to be "losing" in the big hit determination table T1, it is determined to be "with reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of retained balls is "1 ~ 2" and the variation pattern random number is "0 to 60", the variation pattern is determined to be "P7". In FIG. 11, for example, the second start port 21 is won in the time saving state, it is determined as "jackpot" in the jackpot determination table T1, and it is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table T5, variation pattern random value is "0 to 10", the variation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes normal reach or super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, three types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3) with different fluctuation times are set. The length of the fluctuation time is SP3>SP2>SP1. In SP1-3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1-3 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-reams.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric tube opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) in order to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 12A, the open pattern of the electric tube 22 is determined as "open pattern 11" in the "non-time saving state", and the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 12" in the "time saving state". is shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of open pattern 11 and open pattern 12 . In the opening pattern 11, the power tube 22 is opened once for an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the power tube 22 is opened three times with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per opening and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have won a prize (prescribed number of winning prizes, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). 35 is a table referenced to determine the T.35 opening pattern. In FIG. 13(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is "opening pattern 21 ”, and when the special figure stop design data is “14H” or “15H”, the open pattern is determined as “open pattern 22”, and when the special figure stop design data is “13H”, the open pattern is “open Pattern 23” is determined. FIG. 13B shows the contents of open pattern 21, open pattern 22, and open pattern 23. FIG. In the opening pattern 21, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of times of opening is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The opening (long opening) of the second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is performed. In the opening pattern 22, in the 1st to 13th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning opening 35 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 seconds, and the first big winning opening 30 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 second for 1 time at the 15th round. . In the opening pattern 23, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning port 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 16th round, the second big prize winning port 35 is opened once for 29.5 seconds (long opening). . However, the opening of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is, if there is a predetermined number of game ball wins (regular winning number, maximum 9), even if the opening time remains Closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main process (described later). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined as "open pattern 31", and the special figure stop symbol data When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 32", and when the special figure stop design data is "14H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 33", and the special figure stop design data is At "15H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 34". FIG. 14B shows the contents of open pattern 31, open pattern 32, open pattern 33, and open pattern . In the opening pattern 31, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first prize, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is reached. A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th R's, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 8th and 10th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won. The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time with an opening time of maximum 31.5 seconds. In the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the opening pattern 34, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. .

4. Explanation of Big Wins, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "big wins" and "losses" as a result of a big win lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big win", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "big win". In the case of "losing", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "losing". When the jackpot is won, the jackpot game opens the jackpots (the first jackpot 30 and the second jackpot 35) in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the jackpot type). ” is executed. A jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. there is Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round. The closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into two types, namely, "V-passing scheduled jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". The ``V passage scheduled jackpot'' operates the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37 and the V opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V passage scheduled opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the big winning game. It's a big hit. Here, the special figure stop symbol data 11H to 14H, 21H jackpots correspond to the "V passage scheduled jackpot". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. ), or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), it is possible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a jackpot that activates the Here, the jackpot with the special figure stop symbol data of 17H corresponds to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. Passage of a game ball to 39 becomes impossible. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves both as the V-passing planned opening pattern and the V-non-passing planned opening pattern.

The "V passage expected jackpot" includes "16RV expected passage jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot". The "16RV scheduled jackpot" has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the 2nd big prize-winning mouth 35 for maximum 29.5 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, and the rounds are such that no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 33 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantial 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in the 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in the 14R The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short and no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 32 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the substantial total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short, making it a round in which prize balls cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, the opening is short opening (Fig. It is almost impossible for a game ball to pass through.

As is clear from the above description, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are the first big prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 ( The opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37) is the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, and the game state after the jackpot is It becomes a low-probability short-time state (low-probability high base state). On the other hand, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", the game ball can easily pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, and the game state after the jackpot is highly certain. It becomes a time saving state (high accuracy high base state). As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", and the game state after the jackpot is not certain. It becomes difficult to determine whether it will be a time saving state (low probability high base state) or a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state). That is, the game state after "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" is a high probability short time state (high probability high base state ), but with a high probability, it becomes a latent state (latent probability variable state).

Also, as shown in FIG. 9, the distribution ratio of the jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol (special pattern 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V-passing scheduled jackpot and 60/60 for the V non-passing scheduled jackpot. 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the jackpots won in the lottery for the second special symbol (special pattern 2) are all V-passing schedule jackpots. That is, when a jackpot is won by a lottery based on winning a prize to the second starting port 21 that can enter the ball by executing the electric sapo control described later, it is always a V passage scheduled jackpot. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) is performed by winning a game ball in the first start port 20, and the jackpot is performed by winning a game ball in the second start port 21. The lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Explanation of Game State The game state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability variation control" and "variation time shortening control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display device 42, respectively. is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the probability variation with respect to the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41 is called "high probability state", and the state in which the probability variation is not controlled is simply "normal probability state ( non-high-probability state, low-probability state). The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high-probability state than in the normal-probability state as the probability variation control of the special symbols. A high probability state is realized by performing a big hit determination. Therefore, in the high-probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the normal-probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control for the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the special symbol display device 41 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern becomes a jackpot pattern increases.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs variable time shortening control on the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the variable time shortening control is not performed is simply a "non-time saving state". It says. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, when in the time saving state, the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) is determined so that the variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state. The variation pattern used is determined. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41, the special symbols are variable compared to the case where the variation time shortening control is not performed. A short variation time is likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning to the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. Incidentally, the game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 . That is, the game control microcomputer 81 normally executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the symbol in the case of the time saving state, and does not execute it in the case of the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, as the probability variation control of normal symbols, normal symbol hit determination table T3 ( Using FIG. 8 (C)), hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed. Therefore, in the time saving state, the probability of winning is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the probability variation control on the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the normal symbol display device 42 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the normal pattern becomes a winning pattern increases. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter than the non-working time saving state. Here, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than the non-time saving state (Fig. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing opening time extension control for the electric chew 22 . In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the control for increasing the number of times of opening the electric chew 22 . game control microcomputer 81, the probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and the opening time extension control and opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game balls enter the second starting port 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called the "high base state", and the state in which they are not executed is called the "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning to the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric sapo control state) does not have to execute all of the above controls. That is, the probability variation control for the normal pattern of the normal symbol display device 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22 By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more likely to be opened than when the controls are not executed. Further, the high base state (electrical support control state) may be independently controlled without accompanying the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V passage scheduled jackpot is a high-probability state, a short-time state and a high-base state if the passage to the V area 39 is made during the jackpot game. . This game state is particularly referred to as a "high probability high base state" or a "high probability short working time state". The high-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 160 times), or when a big win is won and the big win game is executed. In addition, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is normal probability state (non-high probability state (i.e., low-probability state) and time-saving state and high-base state. This game state is particularly referred to as "low probability high base state" and "low probability time saving state". The low-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or when a big win is won and the big win game is executed. When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after power-on is a normal probability state, a non-time-saving state, and a low-base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low-probability low base state may be referred to as "normal game state" or "low-probability non-time-saving state (simply referred to as non-time-saving state)". Also, the state during execution of the special game (jackpot game) is referred to as "special game state (jackpot game state)". Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is referred to as a "specific game state".

In high-base states such as high-probability-high base state and low-probability-high base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting to the right. Due to the electric sapo control, it is easier to open the electric tube 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second start opening 21 than the first start opening 20. be. From this, in the high base state, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 that triggers the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is struck to the right to win the game ball to the second start port 21.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting prizes (winning at the starting opening) than when hitting left. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting to the left. Since the electric sapo control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first start opening 20 than the second start opening 21. This is because For this reason, in the low base state, left-handed hitting is performed in order to make the game ball enter the first start hole 20. - 特許庁This allows you to get more starting prizes than hitting right.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84 . The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the success/failure determination means (FIG. 23) and the success/failure preliminary determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83 . In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initial setting is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs normal design/special design main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 controls various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, variation pattern random number) shown in FIG. , Normal random number) is added by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (step S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, 4 msec intervals). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing is finished, until the next main side timer interrupt processing is started, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 while interrupts are disabled, the main-side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after interrupts are enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the processing for updating the various random number counter values consists of the execution period of the main-side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main-side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main-side timer interrupt processing). and both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning hole to the main RAM 84. set in the buffer. The various sensors are, for example, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a (FIG. 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a starting opening sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V area sensor detection process (step S106), and a reserved ball. The number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs to the sub-control board 90 the commands set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In other processing, for example, based on the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls to be described later, the second special-figure reservation display 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating the number, and the first special-figure based on the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls The pending indicator 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal pattern reserved balls is the number of normal pattern reservations, more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of normal pattern reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the normal design reserved ball number is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal design reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal design reserved balls (step S203), normal design random number acquisition processing is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: label-TRND-H value), and stores the acquired random number in the first to normal symbol reservation storage areas 86 of the main RAM 84. Among the fourth storage areas, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a. When the game ball has not won the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special figure 2 reservation balls is the number of second special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of second special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-AS value), the reach random number counter value (Figure 7: label -TRND-RC value) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: Label-TRND-T1 value). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random value group in the storage area corresponding to the current special figure 2 reservation ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b for the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). The details of the special figure 2 pre-determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 20. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won the first start port 20 (step S210: NO), this process is terminated. When the game ball wins the first start port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" ( step S211). The number of special figure 1 reservation balls is the number of the first special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of the first special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are obtained in the same manner as the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208) described above. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in the storage area corresponding to the current special figure 1 reserved ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the obtained random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 19) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). The details of the special figure 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 pre-determination process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S301). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is OFF, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the variable probability flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the high-probability state table in the big-hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the big-hit prior determination (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a prior determination of whether or not the game is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the big hit random number value. Here, since the high probability state (probability variation flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the table for the high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") among the jackpot determination tables T1. Refer to it and determine in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the big hit random number is "0" to "649", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". In addition, in this embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later. Pre-determination may be performed using the jackpot determination table.

If the result of the jackpot preliminary determination is "losing" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, a jackpot type random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the buffer for pre-determination by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) to get Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs prior determination of the jackpot type based on the obtained jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random value is any of "0" to "127", it is determined in advance as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later, but as another embodiment, different from the jackpot type determination table T5 Prior determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs fluctuation pattern prior determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81, first, variation pattern random number as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), And get the reach random value. Next, here, since the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state (FIG. 11), the jackpot prior determination result of step S304, Reach presence or absence pre-determined results obtained from the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern is specified from the fluctuation pattern random number. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern to be selected may differ depending on the number of held balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that can be selected depending on the difference in the number of held balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach presence/absence pre-determination result, it is pre-determined that there is a reach, and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of pending balls is "1-2 and the variation pattern "P68" which is selected when the number of held balls is "3 to 4". In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the later-described variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) is used for preliminary determination, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 Pre-determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for pre-determination different from.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes a jackpot pre-determination result, (a jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of winning), and a variation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special figure 1 pre-determination process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the special figure 2 pre-determining process described above, when the probability variation flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is finished. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the jackpot prior determination (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213) do. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the normal probability state table (jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") out of the jackpot determination table T1. ”), it is determined in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". Incidentally, for the jackpot preliminary determination, a jackpot determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. After that, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), so the description is omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of normal operation processing (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is fluctuating (step S502). When the normal pattern is fluctuating (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not fluctuating (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). If the number of pending balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process is terminated. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", in step S203 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is temporarily set to "1". ”, and then, in this step S504, the reservation is digested and immediately the number of reserved balls of the normal design becomes “0”. This is the same for the number of reserved balls of special symbols. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then step S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) to be described later. At S1410, the reservation is digested and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, the normal pattern random number value ( random number). Then, the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether or not the time saving state), and the normal symbol winning determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not the game is successful. For example, in the non-time-saving state, when the normal symbol random number is "0" to "2", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random number is other than that, it is determined as "losing". (See FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to determine the normal symbol variation. Select the fluctuation time of the normal design as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined as "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined as "1 second" (see FIG. 8(D)). . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern, thereby starting the variable display of the normal symbol (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation time of the normal symbols has passed and ended. The variable time in the normal design is the variable time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8(D)). When the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of normal symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the variable time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variable display (step S509), (Step S510: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is a time-saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22. to select. Here, "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time-saving state, and "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time-saving state. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chewing operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In the above step S501, when the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the condition for closing the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes to the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum winning number (for example, 6), or the time to close the electric chew 22 after the operating time of the electric chew 22 has passed Either one of the things that has been reached is fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process finish.

[Special action processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of special operation processing (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display device 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into four stages, each of which has a "special action status" of "1", Call them "2", "3", and "4". When the "special action status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, big hit determination, variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special action status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation process, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special action status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command and the like are executed at the time of the big hit. When the "special action status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessary product process, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401). If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 21 If not stored, the process moves to step S1407. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1402) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, decrement the number of special figure 2 reserved balls by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 moves the storage location of the pending information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure pending storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. While shifting by one, clear the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the second special figure pending storage area 85b (step S1405). For example, when pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, clear the pending information stored in the fourth storage area. By the above steps, the second special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the leftmost reserved image 9B) is It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left) are on the left side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1402) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern set in step S1403) (including information on variation time).

In step S1401, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" ( step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the first start port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a If not stored, the process moves to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. Along with clearing the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the first special figure pending storage area 85a (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure reservation is digested in the order it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (of the four reserved images 9A, the rightmost reserved image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (out of the four reserved images 9A, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left) are on the right side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1408) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern (including information on variation time) set in step S1409).

In step S1407, when the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by ON/OFF of a demonstration screen display flag for customer waiting. If the standby screen is displayed (step S1413: YES), the process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for the lapse of the predetermined standby time, and sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414), this processing ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, digestion of the second special figure reservation is executed with priority over digestion of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure reservation is a jackpot (V passage scheduled jackpot) that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure reservation. It has become easier to be elected to

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the big hit determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Special figure 2 jackpot determination processing (step S1402) and special figure 1 jackpot determination processing (step S1408) are the same in process flow, so they will be collectively described. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the high probability state table of the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) is referred to and the big hit is determined (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a big hit random number value as a determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 and the big hit random number value to refer to. Here, since it is in a high probability state (probability variable flag is ON), whether or not it is a big hit based on the table for high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") among the big hit determination tables T1 judge.

In step S1501, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to make the big hit determination ( step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), it is a big hit based on the table for the normal probability state (jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") among the big hit determination tables T1 determine whether or not

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as the determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After judging the jackpot type, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is finished. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the big hit determination is "losing", the special figure stop design data (01H) corresponding to the losing design is set in the big hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , the process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1 (step S1409) are similar in process flow, so they will be collectively described. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Determination of whether or not it is in the time saving state is made depending on whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When it is a time saving state (step S1600: YES), a process transfers to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is a special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the process skips to step S1605 because the jackpot type is always the V passage schedule jackpot. When the jackpot is the special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special figure stop design data that has been done.

If the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a fluctuation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of special figure 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ” ~ “P3” part, in the special figure 2 the variation pattern is “P21” ~ “P23” part) is referred to (address is set). From the read variation pattern random number, in special figure 1, either "P1" ~ "P3" as a variation pattern, in special figure 2, either "P21" ~ "P23" is selected.

If the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). to select a variation pattern (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P4” to “P6”) of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ) are referenced. One of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ready-to-win random number is a ready-to-win random number (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random number value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random number. Here, because it is a non-time-saving state, of the reach determination table T2, the reach based on the table for the non-time-saving state (reach determination value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13" part) Determine presence/absence.

When the reach random number is the reach establishment random number (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of reach with loss, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to a non-time saving state. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for loss with non-time-saving state reach, out of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P14", the part of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, the read variation pattern random number, from the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4), either "P24" ~ "P31" is selected as the variation pattern. Since the selected variation pattern changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works. That is, in both special figures 1 and 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". Short fluctuation patterns are being selected more often. As a result, when the number of retained balls is large, the digestion speed of special figure retention can be increased.

When the reach random number is not the reach establishment random number (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to a non-time saving state. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the reach-less loss table (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time-saving state reach-less loss, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P16", the part of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value read out and the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4) are selected as the variation pattern, either "P15" or "P16". In the special figure 2, the read variation pattern random number, from the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4), either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern. Also here, since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). After that, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, so the description thereof is omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609 different from Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time saving state (FIG. 10) is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, for time saving state The variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V passing scheduled jackpot (in the special figure 1, the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 is "P41" ~ "P43" part, in the special figure 2 the variation pattern is "P61" ~ "P63" part) is referred to. From the read variation pattern random number, either "P41" ~ "P43" as a variation pattern in the special figure 1, "P61" ~ "P63" in the special figure 2 is selected. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot ("P44 ” to “P46”) are referred to. One of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and finishes this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process ( FIG. 16 : step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is started.

[Processing during special symbol fluctuation]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S1701). The special symbol variation time is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbols started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special action status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbols with a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of times of ST and the number of time saving, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "1" (step S1808), and terminates this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) is performed again, and the jackpot determination and the like for the next hold are executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop pattern data, and selects the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the winning jackpot, together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening/closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the release pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs game state reset processing (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special action status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this processing ends.

[Game State Management Processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the high probability state. Here, "160" is set to the variable probability counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. As a result of decrementing the variable probability counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2003). If the value of the variable probability counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the variable probability counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the variable probability flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time-saving counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the time-saving state. Here, at the time of transition to the time saving state, "100" is set to the time saving counter if it is a low probability high base state, and "160" is set to the time saving counter if it is a high probability high base state. As a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2007). When the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information (probability variable state or not, probability variable counter value, time saving state or not, time saving counter value, etc.) on the current game state set just now.

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of game state reset processing (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process is finished. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In other words, during execution of the jackpot game, it becomes a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. In the gaming machine 1, since it is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The “jackpot end flag” is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern have been opened in the jackpot game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening/closing member operation processing for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30. In the V opening/closing member operation process, , the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when a predetermined game ball wins. The details of the V opening/closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

If the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203). The time to open the big prize gate is, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot has passed and the time to start opening in the first round game, or when the big prize gate that was temporarily closed after opening is reopened. It includes the time when the interval time (closed time) has passed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the big winning slot (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

If it is the time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) corresponding to the kind of big win. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round specifying command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information about the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84 . In addition, in this embodiment, the large winning opening is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the opening of the large winning opening is in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In the above-described step S2202, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the conditions for closing the large winning opening are satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes won into the big prize gate in the round game has reached a prescribed maximum number of prizes (for example, 9 per round), or that the time has come to close the big prize gate. (that is, that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has passed since the opening of the big winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the conditions for closing the big winning opening are satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, two seconds) has passed since the big winning opening was closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended, depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has passed since the big winning opening was closed. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", a jackpot ending command is set as jackpot end processing for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passage scheduled It has the same length as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "jackpot". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" for the player, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" , it can be made to recognize that the game ball did not pass through the V area 39 . Incidentally, the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" has the same length as these. After starting the ending of the jackpot, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and the processing is finished.

In the above step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special action status. is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special action process. After that, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed, and this process ends.

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation processing (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (current round) is the open round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds correspond to the opening rounds of the V opening/closing member 71 . The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the value of the round counter is "15", "13", "11", "9", "7" and "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in the round.

If it is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball has won the first big winning hole 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball has been detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no winning in the first big winning hole 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 .

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2504). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), in either case of "short opening" or "long opening", the first ball wins. This is for the purpose of executing a short release (here, 0.1 seconds) at times. In the short opening of the V opening and closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening and closing member 71 is very short, so the first game ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 It is configured to pass through the V region 70 . In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is opened and several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set as the V effective period during which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, 0.1 second) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and the V opening/closing member 71 is being opened. and 1 second after closing is set as the V validity period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). processing (see FIG. 33)). Further, "determine that the game ball detection by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71 is that there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. The period until the game ball entering the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is detected by the V area sensor 39a is considered. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V area 39) during the V valid period is detected, and the V flag is turned on when the V passage is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is supposed not to be turned ON. In addition, when the V flag is ON, the variable probability flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the jackpot game is set to the high probability state (see the game state setting process (see FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the V flag from being set to a high probability state by turning on the V flag based on passing through the V due to a fraudulent act. After the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (step S2520). The “second winning flag” is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first big winning hole 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if it is long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 for a long time and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2523). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (Fig. 14(B)), in the case of "long opening", when the second ball wins, the long opening (here, maximum 31.5 seconds) ) is executed. In addition, here, since the maximum playing time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the big winning opening is 29.5 seconds + interval closing time is 2 seconds), generally, the winning of the second ball is The time from hour to end of round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 has a relatively long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71, at least a part of the game balls after the second ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 will move through the V area 39. configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period during opening of the V opening/closing member 71, and sets the V invalid period together with closing of the V opening/closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening/closing member 71 is open. When the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, two seconds) has passed since the big winning opening was closed. make a judgment.

When the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), performs the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and several seconds (here, one second) after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71, the V invalid period. set and terminate this processing.

When the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). The closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 may be, for example, that a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening/closing member 71 in the case of short-circuit opening. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing are performed (step S2552), and this processing ends. If the closing condition is not met (step S2560: NO), the process ends while the V opening/closing member 71 is kept open and the V effective period continues.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns OFF the first winning flag and the second winning flag (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set to the time saving counter (step S2303). Thereby, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes "non-high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, low probability high base). This low-probability-high base state ends when either condition is satisfied, that is, the variable display of special symbols is performed 100 times, or the next jackpot is won.

On the other hand, in step S2301, when the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets the probability variation counter to "160" (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 turns ON the time saving flag (step S2307), and sets "160" to the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the current jackpot game becomes "high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, high probability and high base). This high-probability/high-base state ends when either the condition that the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner 160 times or the winning of the next jackpot is established.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command contains information about the game state set just now.

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the game ball is not detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is during the V valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds. be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V valid period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this processing. .

[Processing of pending pitches]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the pending ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90, and includes information on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls. . After setting the reserved ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this process.

7. Operation of Production Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the operation explanation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94 .

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing a sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93 . In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization processing, for example, settings of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupt processing (step S4015), and performs random number update processing (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) by adding 1 to it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Moreover, the random number value may be added by 2 or more instead of adding 1 each time. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. After the sub-side timer interrupt processing ends, the random number update processing is repeatedly executed until the next sub-side timer interrupt processing is started.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs the process during the fluctuation production (step S4305). The process during fluctuation production is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the fluctuation production to cause the display screen 7a to execute a specific display production, the details of which will be described later. After the processing during the variation production, the production control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4310). In the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process, etc. , to the relay board 108 . The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received command. In addition, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes an audio effect of outputting audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. Upon receiving various commands, the lamp control board 107 executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number update processing.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). "Prefetching effect determination processing" is a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetching effect, and determining a prefetching effect pattern in the case of execution. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-described look-ahead effect determination processing is skipped. The look-ahead effect is a effect suggesting that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 contains a big hit, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it has received a pending ball number command from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If received (step S4445: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the pending display process, based on the information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number included in the reserved ball number command, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided. The values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the normal figure reservation effect counter are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub-control board 90 side can hold the information of each reserved ball number. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the values of the first special figure pending effect counter, the second special figure pending effect counter, and the general figure pending effect counter, the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), change production start processing is performed (step S4460). "Variation production start processing" is a process of selecting a variation production pattern (contents) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. The details of the fluctuation effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, when it has not received (step S4455: NO), it skips the above-mentioned fluctuation production|presentation start processing.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it is received (step S4465: YES), change effect end processing is performed (step S4470). "Variation effect end processing" is a process for stopping the variation effect that is executed during the special symbol variation. In the fluctuation production end processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets a fluctuation production end command for ending the fluctuation production. As a result, the decoration pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 during fluctuation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. In addition, when the fluctuation stop command is not received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets the information on the special figure stop pattern data set at the time of judging the winning of the jackpot, which is included in the opening command, in the sub-RAM 94.例文帳に追加Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is sent to the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores a predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. , and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In addition, in step S4475, when the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). "Round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the opening of the big winning hole or during the interval between openings in a special game (jackpot game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special figure stop pattern data and information on the number of rounds contained in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, the effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the winning type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and the round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is transmitted to the sub RAM 94. It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, when the round designation|designated command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round production|presentation pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). "Ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets the information on the special figure stop pattern data included in the ending command to the sub-RAM94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, when the ending command is not received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processes, for example, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the information about the game state included in the game state designation command (whether it is a high probability state, whether it is a time saving state, counter, time-saving counter value, etc.) are held in the sub-RAM 94. Moreover, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control makes sub RAM94 hold|maintain the information which V passed, when V passage command is received. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Look-ahead effect determination processing]
FIG. 38 is a flow chart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a preliminary determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 is included in the advance determination command received from the main control board 80, the jackpot advance judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type advance judgment result (jackpot type information), and the variation The pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the advance determination information storage area 94c. In the advance determination information storage area 94c, prefetch effect pattern information is stored in addition to the above-described jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. FIG. 39 (A) shows that as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third special figures 2 pending, the jackpot determination information "losing" and the variation pattern information "P72" "P73" are the first to third A state in which the data is stored in the storage area and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the variation is stored in the area is shown. FIG. 39(B) shows that there is a special figure 2 winning prize from the state of FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, as the prior determination information, the jackpot determination information "jackpot", the jackpot type information "21H", and the variation pattern information "P61" are stored. In addition, "Pattern A ” is set. FIG. 39(C) shows a state in which the change has ended from the state of FIG. 39(B) and the advance determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the relevant area, the prior determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the 4, the pre-determination information in the storage area is cleared. The advance determination information shift process is executed in the fluctuation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas. If the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process is terminated. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any one of the corresponding area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is newly selected and not stored. On the other hand, if the pre-read effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot". Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a "loss with reach" (step S4603). Whether or not it is a “big hit” or a “losing with reach” can be determined by, for example, a variation pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information). The effect control microcomputer 91 ends this processing when the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "no reach" (step S4603: NO). This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, if the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot" or "loss with reach" (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether to execute pre-reading effect, And, look-ahead effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the prefetch effect random number random number, and refers to the acquired random value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect. Whether to perform or not, and the look-ahead effect pattern in the case of performing the look-ahead effect are determined.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, if the pre-determination result is "big hit" and the pre-reading effect random value is "0 to 55", the pre-reading effect is "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "56-67", the pre-reading effect is When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random number is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. Also, if the pre-judgment result is "losing with reach" and the pre-reading effect random value is "0 to 107", the pre-reading effect will be "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "108-114", as a pre-reading effect When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "115 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of random numbers to be selected can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-read effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area A look-ahead rendering pattern is stored in the area and also in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39B, in addition to setting "Pattern A" in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command, the first to third storage areas and Also set "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is executed even in the variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (variable effects corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). . Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing for executing the look-ahead performance has already passed, the look-ahead performance is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead performance, it is executed at that timing. This will be discussed later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flow chart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information on the special figure stop design data included in the variation start command and the information on the variation pattern to the sub-RAM 94 . The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, pattern information indicating a pattern as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 .

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs basic production pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process includes the basic configuration of the variable effect (for example, the display of the background image on the image display device 7 and its switching, the display of a predetermined character and its operation, the output of the melody and sound effect using the speaker 67). , lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as a chance-up effect and a look-ahead effect on the basic effect. The performance control microcomputer 91 refers to a basic performance pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93 to determine a basic performance pattern.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, there are multiple types of core performance patterns for normal reach performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP1 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP2 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP3 performance, There are multiple types of basic production patterns that perform a loss production without reach. The type of basic effect pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the basic effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", the basic effect pattern for performing the reach-less loss effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs chance-up effect pattern determination processing (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. A performance control microcomputer 91 acquires a counter value of a chance-up random number, refers to the acquired random number and a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in a sub ROM 93, and determines a chance-up performance pattern.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, of the chance-up production pattern determination table T53, only the portion for determining the variable production pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time-saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows the chance-up effect pattern executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16". The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 has a portion for determining the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the variation patterns are "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". It may or may not be provided.

In FIG. 43, "2-NO" "2-SP1" "2-SP2" "2-SP3" "3-NO" "3-SP1" "3-SP2" "3-SP3" " 4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3" and "ANO" are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance-up effects, which will be described later. The type and contents of the chance-up production pattern are not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and combinations of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed. may be determined. Based on these, it is determined what kind of effect is performed as the variable effect.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 is realized ( step S5020). When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the variable effect image. It is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 .

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect timer (step S5030), and terminates this process. A variable time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set to the variation effect timer.

[Processing during fluctuation effect]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart of the processing during the fluctuation effect (FIG. 36: step S4305). The production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the variable production is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variable effect is being performed can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variable effect timer is zero. If the variable effect is not being executed (step SS4701: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set the pre-variation end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command from the effect control microcomputer 91 to inform the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the change effect. , the effect content is switched, a specific image is displayed, etc., in accordance with the information included in the command before the end of variation.

If it is not the timing to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is time to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area of the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), the pre-variation end command containing the prefetch effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-fluctuation end command that does not include look-ahead effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is the look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command including the look-ahead effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a look-ahead effect for displaying a look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the preview fade effect of fading the preview image.

8. Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. A RAM 104 is provided with buffers and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 . FIG. 45 is a flowchart of display control processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not it has received a variation effect start command from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variable effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variable effect start command, reads out a predetermined variable effect image instructed in the variable effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. display. On the other hand, if not received (step S5001: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-change end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If it has been received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-variation end command, and if the pre-variation end command includes pre-reading effect pattern information, reads out a predetermined pre-reading effect image from the ROM 103, and displays the image display device. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, even if the pre-variation ending command does not include the pre-reading effect pattern information, if the preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the preview fade effect of fading the preview image is performed. Do. On the other hand, if not received (step S5003: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not it has received a command to end the variation effect from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). If it has been received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the image in which the variable effect is stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variable effect stop display to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if not received (step S5005: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined opening effect image instructed in the opening effect start command, and displays it on the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a. Further, when a round effect start command is received, a predetermined round effect image instructed in the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Also, when the ending effect start command is received, a predetermined ending effect image instructed in the ending effect start command is read out from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and this processing ends.

9. Operation of Movable Accessory (Board Movable Body 15) FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the movable accessory (board movable body 15).
The effect control microcomputer 91 controls the movement of the board movable body 15 during the game effect (display effect), the initial operation when the power is turned on, and the like. The plate movable body 15 is in the home position when it is in the position shown in FIG. On the other hand, the plate movable body 15 is in the unfolded position as shown in FIG. A performance control microcomputer 91 can control the movement of the board movable body 15 from the home position to the development position. The board movable body 15 is basically located at the home position, and is movably controlled to the expanded position by the performance control microcomputer 91 according to the display performance (game performance). When the board movable body 15 is movably controlled to the unfolded position, it is arranged on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (on the front side of the display screen 7a). is arranged at a position overlapping with a predetermined region of Therefore, in this case, the board movable body 15 blocks a predetermined area of the display screen 7a as seen from the player. Further, the board movable body 15 has a star-shaped hole 15a in its central portion. Therefore, when the board movable body 15 is in the unfolded position, a part of the display screen 7a can be seen through the hole 15a. Further, when the board movable body 15 is at the home position, the board movable body 15 is positioned so as not to overlap the display screen 7a.

10. Effect Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Aspect Examples of the Present Embodiment Below, each effect example (display effect example, character object movable effect example) of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and a mode example for the effect example will also be described.
The effect to be described from now on is based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above, based on the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). Note that the following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In addition, in the example of the display effect, the suspension display (suspension icon) is omitted unless it is particularly necessary.

The button image action effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49. FIG. This button image action effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols or during the ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the button image action effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen. This is a display effect displayed on 7a.

[Button image action effect A]
FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the button image action effect A. FIG. In the button image action effect A, first, the display of the first button image shown in FIG. 47(A) is executed. This first button image display is executed, for example, during the ready-to-win effect of decorative symbols. Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, the pending images (suspended icons) 9A and 9B and the pending digested image (the relevant pending icon) 9C move leftward (in the direction of the black arrow) and frame out of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47B, while the first button image BI1 is displayed, the second button image BI2 is displayed to the upper left of the first button image BI1. Part of the second button image BI2 overlaps with the production design. In this specification, "images overlap" means that images appear to be overlapped from the player's point of view, and whether or not they actually overlap is irrelevant. For example, when at least part of one image displayed on the display screen 7a appears to be missing due to the other image, it can be said that the images overlap.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47C, with the first button image BI1 and the second button image BI2 displayed, the third button image BI3 is displayed to the lower right of the first button image BI1. . Next, as shown in FIG. 47D, with the first button image BI1, the second button image BI2, and the third button image BI3 displayed, move the fourth button image upward to the upper right of the first button image BI1. BI4 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(E), with the first button image BI1, the second button image BI2, the third button image BI3, and the fourth button image BI4 displayed, A fifth button image BI5 is displayed in the direction. After that, as shown in FIG. 47(F), with the first button image BI1 and the fifth button image BI5 displayed, the characters "Press!!!" are displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. An image (button operation promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation effective period of the effect button 63 are displayed.

[Button image action effect B]
FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the button image action effect B. FIG. The button image action effect B differs from the button image action effect A of FIG. 47 in the timing at which the second to fourth button images disappear from the display screen 7a. The display of the first button image in FIG. 48(A) is the same as in FIG. 47(A). That is, the first button image BI1 is displayed, and the pending images (suspended icons) 9A and 9B and the pending digested image (the pending icon) 9C move leftward and out of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48B, while the first button image BI1 is displayed, the second button image BI2 is displayed to the upper left of the first button image BI1. The second button image BI2 is larger than the first button image BI1. Part of the second button image BI2 overlaps with the production design. The second button image BI2 disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined second has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(C), substantially at the same time as the second button image BI2 disappears from the display screen 7a, a third button image BI3 is displayed to the lower right of the first button image BI1. The third button image BI3 is larger than the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed. The third button image BI3 disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined second has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(D), substantially at the same time that the third button image BI3 disappears from the display screen 7a, a fourth button image BI4 is displayed to the upper right of the first button image BI1. The fourth button image BI4 is larger than the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed. The fourth button image BI4 disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined second has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(E), almost simultaneously with the disappearance of the fourth button image BI4 from the display screen 7a, the fifth button image BI5 is displayed in the lower left direction of the first button image BI1. The fifth button image BI5 is larger than the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 48(F), in a state in which the first button image BI1 and the fifth button image BI5 are displayed, the button operation prompting image OPI of "Press!!!" and the timer bar TBI are displayed. be. The display time of the fifth button image BI5 is longer than the display times of the second to fourth button images.

[Button image action effect C]
FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the button image action effect C. FIG. The button image action effect C differs from the button image action effect B shown in FIG. 48 in that an effect of mainly moving the button image is performed. In the display of the first button image in FIG. 49(A), the first button image BI1 is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 48(A). icon) 9C does not move and is displayed as it is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 49B, while the first button image BI1 is displayed, the second button image BI2 is displayed to the upper left of the first button image BI1. The second button image BI2 is larger than the first button image BI1 and is displayed tilted with respect to the first button image BI1. Part of the second button image BI2 overlaps with the production design. The second button image BI2 disappears from the display screen 7a after a lapse of a predetermined second, and a ball of light image appears at the same position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 49(C), the ball of light image moves in the lower right direction of the first button image, and at that position the ball of light image disappears and the third button image BI3 is displayed. The third button image BI3 is larger than the first button image BI1 and is displayed tilted with respect to the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed. The third button image BI3 disappears from the display screen 7a after a lapse of a predetermined second, and a ball of light image appears at the same position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 49(D), the ball of light image moves to the right of the first button image, and at that position the ball of light image disappears and the fourth button image BI4 is displayed. The fourth button image BI4 is larger than the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 49(E), both the fourth button image BI4 and the first button image BI1 move in the lower left direction and then stop. After that, as shown in FIG. 49F, in a state in which the first button image BI1 and the fourth button image BI4 are displayed, the button operation prompting image OPI of "Press!!!" and the timer bar TBI are displayed. be. The timer bar TBI overlaps part of the fourth button image BI4. The display time of the fourth button image BI4 is longer than the display times of the second and third button images.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the button image action presentation is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, the second button image is displayed on the upper left of the first button image BI1. A first effect in which BI2 is displayed; It is possible to carry out directing and Further, as shown in FIG. 49, a first effect in which a second button image BI2 is displayed on the upper left of the first button image BI1 while the first button image BI1 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. , after the first effect, a second effect in which a fourth button image BI4 is displayed to the left of the first button image BI1 in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, since the button images appear one after another at different positions on the display screen 7a, the player can be visually entertained, and the amusement can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, in the second effect in which the fifth button image BI5 is displayed at the lower left of the first button image BI1 while the first button image BI1 is displayed, , the second button image BI2 is not displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, in the second effect in which the fourth button image BI4 is displayed to the left of the first button image BI1 while the first button image BI1 is displayed, the second button image BI2 is Do not show. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide an effect as if the button image that disappeared from the display screen 7a reappears at a different position on the display screen 7a, thereby improving the entertainment.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, in the second effect in which the fifth button image BI5 is displayed at the lower left of the first button image BI1 while the first button image BI1 is displayed, The display time of the fifth button image BI5 is the display time of the second button image BI2 in the first effect in which the second button image BI2 is displayed on the upper left of the first button image BI1 while the first button image BI1 is displayed. Longer than display time. again,
As shown in FIG. 49, the display time of the fourth button image BI4 is , is longer than the display time of the second button image BI2 in the first effect in which the second button image BI2 is displayed on the upper left of the first button image BI1 while the first button image BI1 is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to change the display time of the button image that appears in the state where the first button image BI1 is displayed, and to improve interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, the second button image BI2 and the fifth button image BI5 are each larger than the first button image BI1. Also, as shown in FIG. 49, the second button image BI2 and the fourth button image BI4 are each larger than the first button image BI1. According to this configuration, it is possible to surprise the player when the button image that appears in the state where the first button image BI1 is displayed is displayed, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the second button image BI2 is displayed tilted with respect to the first button image BI1. According to this configuration, the display of the second button image BI2 that appears in the state where the first button image BI1 is displayed can be given a sense of dynamism, and interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the second button image BI2 may be displayed overlapping the decoration pattern. According to this configuration, the second button image BI2 appearing in the state where the first button image BI1 is displayed looks like it is located behind the decoration image, and it is possible to produce a sense of depth in the display, which is interesting. can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the button operation prompting image OPI of "Press!!!" is displayed in a state where the fifth button image BI5 is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, the button operation prompting image OPI is displayed in a state where the fourth button image BI4 is displayed. According to this configuration, since the button image OPI appears together with the button image appearing in the state where the first button image BI1 is displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of tension, thereby improving the interest. be able to.

[Modification]
Modifications of the button image action effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, an effect using a button image representing the appearance of the effect button 63 is performed. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform a similar effect using an image representing the appearance of a type of operation unit other than the effect button 63 . For example, instead of the button image, an image representing the appearance of the sword member 64 or the sword button 65 may be used to produce a similar effect. Also, an image of an arbitrary operation unit such as a handle image, a lever image, or a trigger image may be used. In addition to the image of the operation unit, any image such as specific characters, figures, symbols, or character images may be used.

[Modification 2]
The display contents of the button image action effects A to C shown in FIGS. 47 to 49 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. For example, in the button image action effect A, the pending icons 9A, 9B, and 9C are framed out of the display screen 7a. Also, the button image action effects A to C may not include some of the effects shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, or may include other effects. Further, the button image action effects A to C are not limited to the positions shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, and may be placed at arbitrary positions with respect to the positions of the button images, decoration patterns, and reserved icons.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, five button images (first to fifth button images) appear in FIGS. 47 and 48, and four button images (first to fourth button images) appear in FIG. However, the number of button images appearing in the button image action effect may be 1 to 3, or may be 6 or more.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A1-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image representing an appearance of the operation means;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second image representing an appearance of the operation means;
one of the plurality of types of images is a third image representing an appearance of the operation means;
A first display device in which the second image is displayed at a second position away from the first image in a first direction while the first image is displayed at a first position on the display means. and after the first effect, the third image is displayed at a third position away from the first image in the second direction while the first image is displayed. A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute a second effect that
[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
The gaming machine, wherein the second image is not displayed in the second effect.
[Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1 or aspect A1-2,
A gaming machine, wherein the display time of the third image in the second effect is longer than the display time of the second image in the first effect.
[Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
The gaming machine, wherein the second image and the third image are each larger than the first image.
[Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-4,
The gaming machine, wherein in the first effect, the second image is displayed tilted with respect to the first image.
[Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-5,
The gaming machine, wherein in the first effect, the second image may be displayed overlapping a decorative pattern.
[Aspect A1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-6,
one of the plurality of types of images is a fourth image for prompting the player to operate the operation unit;
A gaming machine, wherein the fourth image is displayed at a fourth position while the third image is displayed at the third position of the display means.

50 to 52, the operation section partial enlarged display effect will be described. This operation section partial enlargement display effect can be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols or during a ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute the operation section partial enlarged display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103. This is a display effect displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Partial enlargement display effect of operation part A]
FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining operation portion partial enlarged display effect A. FIG. In the operation section partial enlarged display effect A, first, the sword member image display of FIG. 50(A) is executed. This sword member image display is executed, for example, during the ready-to-win effect of the decorative symbol. Here, a sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center right of the display screen 7a. The sword member image ASI also includes a first sword button image PSB representing the appearance of the sword button 65 . That is, since the sword button 65 is provided at the end of the hilt of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1), the first sword button image PSB is drawn at the end of the hilt represented by the sword member image ASI. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50B, with the sword member image ASI displayed, a second sword button image SBI appears from the position of the first sword button image PSB in the sword member image ASI. The second sword button image SBI is an image representing the appearance of the sword button 65, like the first sword button image PSB. In other words, the second sword button image SBI is an image representing a portion of the sword member image ASI (first sword button image PSB).

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(C), the second sword button image SBI is enlarged and moved downward to the left, and stops at the left side of the sword member image ASI. As a result, the second sword button image SBI, which is larger than the sword member image ASI, is displayed while the sword member image ASI is being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(D), while the sword member image ASI and the second sword button image SBI are displayed, the player presses "Press!!!" to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. A character image (button operation prompting image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the effective period of operation of the sword button 65 are displayed. The button operation prompting image OPI and the timer bar TBI are displayed overlapping the second sword button image SBI. In other words, the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second sword button image SBI than the sword member image ASI.

When the player operates the sword member 64, as shown in FIG. 50(E), the second sword button image SBI disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. After that, as shown in FIG. 50(F), the explosion image EXI disappears from the display screen 7a, and the performance symbols are stop-displayed as lost symbols.

[Partial enlargement display effect of operation part B]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining operation portion partial enlarged display effect B. FIG. In the operation section partial enlarged display effect B, first, the display of the first button image shown in FIG. 51(A) is executed. This first button image display is executed, for example, during the ready-to-win effect of decorative symbols. Here, a first button image BI representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 51B, the second button image BB appears from the first button image BI while the first button image BI is displayed. Like the first button image BI, the second button image BB is an image representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1).

Next, as shown in FIG. 51(C), the second button image BB moves to the left while being enlarged, and stops when the left part of the second button image BB is out of the frame of the display screen 7a. . As a result, in a state where the first button image BI is displayed, the second button image BB which is larger than the sword member image ASI is displayed although the left part is not displayed. Since both the first button image BI and the second button image BB represent the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1), the second button image BB, the left part of which is not displayed, is the same as the first button image BI. This is an image representing a portion (a portion other than the left side of the effect button 63).

Next, as shown in FIG. 51(D), the player is urged to operate the effect button 63 in a state in which the first button image BI and the second button image BB whose left part is partially out of the frame are displayed. (button operation prompting image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation effective period of the effect button 63 are displayed. The button operation prompting image OPI and the timer bar TBI are displayed overlapping the second button image BB. In other words, the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second button image BB than the first button image BI.

When the player operates the effect button 63, the second button image BB is framed out of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 51(E). After that, as shown in FIG. 51(F), the effect symbol is stop-displayed as a lost symbol.

[Operating part enlarged display effect C]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining operation portion partial enlarged display effect C. As shown in FIG. In the operation section partial enlarged display effect C, first, the select button image display of FIG. 52(A) is executed. This select button image display is performed, for example, during the ready-to-win effect of decorative symbols. Here, a select button image SSI representing the appearance of the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower right of the display screen 7a. The select button image SSI is composed of four button images corresponding to the four buttons (left button, right button, up button, down button) that constitute the select button 68 (FIG. 1). Here, among the select button images SSI, the image corresponding to the left button of the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is called "first left button image LI", and the image corresponding to the right button is called "first right button image RI ”. In addition to the select button image SSI, a plurality of panel images PN are displayed on the display screen 7a. A predetermined image (for example, a character image) may be drawn on each panel of the panel image PN.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52B, with the select button image SSI displayed, the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI are displayed below the display screen 7a. The second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI, like the first left button image LI and the first right button image RI, represent the appearance of the left button and right button of the select button image SSI. . The second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI are larger than the select button image SSI. The second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI are images representing a portion (left button and right button) of the select button image SSI.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(C), with the select button image SSI, the second left button image PLI, and the second right button image PRI being displayed, the player is urged to operate the effect button 63. (button operation prompting image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the effective period of operation of the select button 68 are displayed. The timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI than the select button image SSI.

When the player operates the left button of the select button image SSI, as shown in FIG. 52(D), the color of the second left button image PLI changes and it is selected and displayed enlarged in the panel image PN. panel is replaced. When the operation effective period of the select button 68 expires, the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI disappear from the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 52(F), the selected panel image PN is enlarged and displayed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the effect of the enlarged display of the operating part portion will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50(C), when the sword member image ASI is displayed, the second sword button representing a portion of the sword member image ASI (first sword button image PSB) is displayed. An effect in which the image SBI is displayed can be executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 51(C), while the first button image BI is being displayed, a second button image BB representing a portion of the first button image BI (a portion other than the left side of the effect button 63) is displayed. is executable. Further, as shown in FIG. 52B, in a state where the select button image SSI is displayed, a second left button image PLI and a second right button image PLI representing a part (left button and right button) of the select button image SSI are displayed. An effect in which the PRI is displayed can be executed. According to these configurations, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50(C), the second sword button image SBI representing a portion of the sword member image ASI (first sword button image PSB) is larger than the sword member image ASI. . Further, as shown in FIG. 51(C), a second button image BB representing a portion of the first button image BI (a portion other than the left side of the effect button 63) is larger than the first button image BI. Also, as shown in FIG. 52B, a second left button image PLI and a second right button image PRI representing a portion (left button and right button) of the select button image SSI are larger than the select button image SSI. According to these configurations, it is possible to surprise the player and improve interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50(D), the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second sword button image SBI than the sword member image ASI. Further, as shown in FIG. 51(D), the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second button image BB than the first button image BI. Also, as shown in FIG. 52(C), the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI than the select button image SSI. According to these configurations, it is possible to impress the player with a novel presentation, and to improve interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50A to 50F, the display time of the second sword button image SBI is shorter than the display time of the sword member image ASI. Further, as shown in FIGS. 51A to 51F, the display time of the second button image BB is shorter than the display time of the first button image BI. Further, as shown in FIGS. 52A to 52F, the display time of the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI is shorter than the display time of the select button image SSI. According to these configurations, it is possible to impress the player with a novel performance, and to improve interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the sword member 64 can perform a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 and a second operation of pushing the sword button 65. As shown in FIG. The member image ASI shows the portion that moves when the sword member 64 is operated for the first time (sword member pushing operation), and the second sword button image SBI shows the portion for the second operation of the sword member 64 (sword button pushing operation). It shows moving parts. The select button 68 can perform a first operation of pressing the up button and the down button, and a second operation of pressing the left button and the right button. As shown in FIG. 52, the select button image SSI is: The second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI show the parts that move when the select button 68 is first operated (up/down button pressing operation). operation). According to these configurations, it is possible to impress the player with a novel presentation, and to improve interest.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the operation part partial enlarged display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, a first operating portion image representing the appearance of the effect button 63, the sword member 64, or the select button 68, and a second operating portion image representing a portion of the operating portion image. The production using the operation part image of is performed. However, the gaming machine 1 may use, as the first operation section image, an image representing the appearance of a type of operation section other than the above. For example, the first operating section image may be an image of any operating section such as a steering wheel image, a lever image, or a trigger image.

[Modification 2]
The display contents of the operation section partial enlarged display effects A to C shown in FIGS. 50 to 52 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. Further, the operation section partial enlarged display effects A to C may not include some of the effects shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, or may include other effects. In addition, the operation part enlarged display effects A to C are not limited to the arrangement positions shown in FIGS.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A2-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image representing an appearance of the operation means;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second image representing a portion of the operation means displayed in the first image;
A gaming machine capable of executing a first effect in which the second image is displayed at a second position in a state where the first image is displayed at the first position of the display means. .
[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
The gaming machine, wherein in the first effect, the second image is larger than the first image.
[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1 or aspect A2-2,
one of the plurality of types of images is a third image representing an operation reception period of the operation means;
A gaming machine, wherein in the first effect, the third image is displayed at a third position of the display means closer to the second position than the first position.
[Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3,
A gaming machine, wherein in the first effect, the display time of the second image is shorter than the display time of the first image.
[Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-4,
The operation means is capable of executing a first operation and a second operation with different operation methods,
The first image shows a portion of the operating means that is movable during the first operation,
The gaming machine, wherein the second image indicates a portion of the operating means that is movable when the second operation is performed.

53 to 56, the operation portion image protrusion movement effect will be described. This operating portion image protruding movement effect can be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols or during a ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command to start the variation effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute the operation portion image protrusion movement effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103. This is a display effect displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Operating part image projection A]
53A and 53B are diagrams for explaining the operating portion image protrusion movement effect A. FIG. In the operating portion image protrusion movement effect A, first, the pending icon movement effect of FIG. 53(A) is executed. This pending icon movement effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect of decorative symbols, for example. Here, the suspended images (suspended icons) 9A and 9B and the suspended digested image (the suspended icon) 9C are moved leftward and framed out of the display screen 7a.

Next, the enlargement button image appearance effect of FIG. 53(B) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed on the display screen 7a in an enlarged state. Since the button image BB is displayed in an enlarged manner, portions of the button image BB corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button 63 are out of the frame (protruding) from the display screen 7a. In other words, a portion of the button image BB is displayed such that the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button protrude from the display screen 7a. A portion of the displayed button image BB overlaps with the effect pattern.

Next, the button image left movement effect of FIG. 53(C) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB is displayed in a reduced size from the state shown in FIG. 53B and moved leftward, and as shown in FIG. It will be in a state of being framed out from 7a. Next, the button image right movement effect of FIG. 53(D) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB moves rightward from the state shown in FIG. 53(C), and as shown in FIG. state. In other words, a portion of the button image BB is displayed such that the portion corresponding to the right end of the effect button protrudes from the display screen 7a.

Next, the timer display effect of FIG. 53(E) is executed. Specifically, the timer image TN is displayed on the button image BB at the same position as in FIG. 53(B). The timer of this timer image TN is of a countdown type, and when the timer value becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation prompting effect of FIG. 53(F) is executed. Specifically, in a state in which the timer image TN is displayed on the button image BB, a character image (button operation prompting image) OPI of "Press!!!" for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63; A timer bar TBI indicating the effective period of operation of the effect button 63 is displayed.

[Operating part image protrusion movement effect B]
54A and 54B are diagrams for explaining the operating portion image protrusion movement effect B. FIG. The operation portion image protrusion movement effect B differs from the operation portion image protrusion movement effect A of FIG. 53 mainly in the manner of movement of the button image BB. The pending icon movement effect of FIG. 54(A) is substantially the same as that of FIG. 53(A). Here, the suspended images (suspended icons) 9A and 9B and the suspended digested image (the suspended icon) 9C move downward and out of the display screen 7a.

Next, the reversal button image appearance effect of FIG. 54(B) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed on the display screen 7a in a vertically inverted and enlarged state. Since the upside down button image BB is displayed in an enlarged manner, both left and right ends are out of the frame of the display screen 7a. A part of the button image BB overlaps with the production pattern.

Next, the reversal button image left movement effect of FIG. 54(C) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB moves leftward as it is from the upside down state shown in FIG. 53(B), and as shown in FIG. A portion corresponding to is framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, the button image rotation effect of FIG. 54(D) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB rotates to the right (clockwise) from the upside down state shown in FIG. 54(E). After that, as shown in FIG. 54(E), a timer display effect is executed. Specifically, a timer image TN is displayed on the button image BB. The timer of this timer image TN is of a countdown type, and when the timer value becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation prompting effect of FIG. 54(F) is executed. Specifically, in a state in which the timer image TN is displayed on the button image BB, a character image (button operation prompting image) OPI of "Press!!!" for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63; A timer bar TBI indicating the effective period of operation of the effect button 63 is displayed.

[Operating part image protrusion movement effect C]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the operating portion image protrusion movement effect C. As shown in FIG. The pending icon movement effect of FIG. 55(A) is the same as that of FIG. 53(A). Next, the sword member image appearance effect of FIG. 55(B) is executed. Specifically, a sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. At this time, the upper and lower ends of the sword member image ASI are framed out of the display screen 7a. That is, of the sword member image ASI, portions corresponding to the tip of the sword and the tip of the hilt are framed out of the display screen 7a. The sword member image ASI moves leftward from the position shown in FIG. 55(B).

Next, the sword member image rotation effect of FIG. 55(C) is executed. As shown in FIG. 55(C), in the sword member image ASI after the leftward movement, only the upper end corresponding to the tip of the hilt is framed out of the display screen 7a. From this state, the sword member image ASI rotates to the right (rotates clockwise) by about 45 degrees, and stops at an angle (posture) in which the sword of the sword member image ASI is parallel to the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

Next, the sword member image moving effect of FIG. 55(D) is executed. As shown in FIG. 55(D), only the upper end of the sword member image ASI after being rotated to the right is framed out of the display screen 7a. From this state, the sword member image ASI moves downward and stops with only the lower end of the sword member image ASI out of the frame of the display screen 7a.

Next, the timer display effect of FIG. 55(E) is executed. As shown in FIG. 55(E), only the lower end of the sword member image ASI after the downward movement is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. In this state, a timer image TN is displayed on the sword member image ASI. The timer of this timer image TN is of a countdown type, and when the timer value becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation prompting effect of FIG. 55(F) is executed. Specifically, in a state in which the timer image TN is displayed on the button image BB, a character image (button operation prompting image) OPI of "Press!!!" for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63; A timer bar TBI indicating the effective period of operation of the effect button 63 is displayed.

[Operating part image protrusion movement effect D]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the operating portion image protrusion movement effect D. FIG. The operation portion image protrusion movement effect D differs from the operation portion image protrusion movement effect C of FIG. 55 mainly in the shape of the sword member image ASI. The sword member 64 has a shape in which the tip of the sword is embedded in the outer frame of the gaming machine 1 (FIG. 1). The sword member image ASI in FIG. 55 does not include an image representing the tip of the sword in accordance with the actual shape of the sword member 64 . On the other hand, the sword member image ASI in FIG. 56 is an image of the entire sword including the tip portion according to the conceptual shape of the sword member 64 . As shown in FIG. 56(A), reach occurs in the effect symbol variation effect. Here, the suspended images (suspended icons) 9A and 9B and the suspended digested image (the suspended icon) 9C do not move.

Next, the enlarged sword member image appearance effect of FIG. 56(B) is executed. As in FIG. 55(B), the sword member image ASI is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, unlike FIG. 55B, the sword member image ASI is enlarged and displayed, and the shape changes so as to represent the state in which the sword rotates about the longitudinal direction as the rotation axis (horizontal rotation of the sword). performance). In other words, the shape of the sword member image ASI changes so as to represent the state in which the sword member 64 rotates about the longitudinal direction as the rotation axis. At this time, the upper and lower ends of the sword member image ASI are framed out of the display screen 7a. That is, of the sword member image ASI, portions corresponding to the tip of the sword and the tip of the hilt are framed out of the display screen 7a. The sword member image ASI moves leftward from the position shown in FIG. 55(B).

Next, the sword member image rotation effect of FIG. 56(C) is executed. As in FIG. 55(C), only the upper end corresponding to the tip of the hilt of the sword member image ASI after the leftward movement is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. On the other hand, unlike FIG. 55(C), the sword member image ASI is displayed in reduced size, and the sword horizontal rotation effect continues. Also, an image of the tip of the sword is displayed on the lower end side of the sword member image ASI. The sword member image ASI rotates about 45 degrees to the right (clockwise rotation), and stops at an angle (posture) in which the sword of the sword member image ASI is parallel to the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

Next, the sword member image moving effect of FIG. 56(D) is executed. As in FIG. 55(D), only the upper end of the sword member image ASI after the right rotation is out of the frame on the display screen 7a, and the horizontal sword rotation effect continues. From this state, the sword member image ASI moves downward and stops with only the lower end of the sword member image ASI out of the frame of the display screen 7a. The sword horizontal rotation production also stops.

Next, the timer display effect of FIG. 56(E) is executed. As in FIG. 55(E), only the lower end of the sword member image ASI is framed out of the display screen 7a. In this state, a timer image TN is displayed on the sword member image ASI. The timer of this timer image TN is of a countdown type, and when the timer value becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation prompting effect of FIG. 56(F) is executed. Similarly to FIG. 55(F), in the state where the timer image TN is displayed on the button image BB, the button operation prompting image OPI of "Press!!!" is displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation portion image protrusion movement effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53(B) and 54(B), portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) protrude from the display screen 7a. A first display in which a portion of the button image BB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and after the first display, as shown in FIGS. A second display in which a portion of the button image BB is displayed so that only the portion corresponding to one end of the effect button 63 protrudes from the display screen 7a, and after the second display, FIG. D), as shown in FIG. 54(E), part of the button image BB is adjusted so that only the part corresponding to the other end of the effect button 63 protrudes from the display screen 7a. and a third display to be displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55(B) and 56(B), the parts corresponding to the upper and lower ends of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) protrude from the display screen 7a. A first display in which a part of the sword member image ASI is displayed on the display screen 7a such that a second display in which a portion of the sword member image ASI is displayed such that only the portion corresponding to the upper end portion of the sword member 64 protrudes from the display screen 7a; 55(E) and 55(E), only the portion of the sword member image ASI corresponding to the lower end portion of the sword member 64 protrudes from the display screen 7a. and a third display in which a portion of the sword member image ASI is displayed. With this configuration as well, it is possible to impress the player with a novel presentation, and to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53(C), the button image BB is displayed so that the portion corresponding to the left end of the effect button 63 protrudes from the display screen 7a. In the second display in which part of BB is displayed, part of button image BB is displayed on the left end of display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. In the third display in which a portion of the button image BB is displayed so that the portion corresponding to the end protrudes from the display screen 7a, the portion of the button image BB is displayed at the right end of the display screen 7a. That is, part of the button image BB in the third display is displayed at a position away from the position displayed in the second display in the right direction. According to this configuration, it is possible to further impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the second display shown in FIGS. 55(C)(D) and 56(C)(D), a part of the sword member image ASI is displayed at the upper end of the display screen 7a. 55(E) and 55(E), a portion of the sword member image ASI is displayed at the lower end of the display screen 7a. That is, a portion of the sword member image ASI in the third display is displayed at a position downwardly away from the position displayed in the second display. With this configuration as well, it is possible to impress the player with a novel performance, and to improve the interest of the player.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a portion of the button image BB in the second display shown in FIG. 53(C) is displayed in a smaller size than a portion of the button image BB in the first display shown in FIG. 55(B). ing. According to this configuration, it is possible to further impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56B, the sword member image ASI changes its shape so as to represent a state in which the sword member 64 rotates about the longitudinal direction as the rotation axis. According to this configuration, it is possible to further impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 56, the timer image TN is displayed on the display screen 7a in the third display. According to this configuration, it is possible to further impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53(E) and 54(E), the timer image TN is displayed overlapping part of the button image BB. Further, as shown in FIGS. 55(E) and 56(E), the timer image TN is displayed overlapping a part of the sword member image ASI. According to this configuration, it is possible to further impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the operation portion image protrusion movement effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, an effect using the button image BB representing the appearance of the effect button 63 is performed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, an effect using a sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64 is performed. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform a similar effect using an image representing the appearance of a type of operation unit other than the effect button 63 and the sword member 64 . Also, any image of an operation unit such as a handle image, a lever image, or a trigger image may be used. In addition to the image of the operation unit, any image such as specific characters, figures, symbols, or character images may be used.

[Modification 2]
The button image BB shown in FIGS. 53 and 54 may change its shape so as to represent a state in which the effect button 63 is rotated vertically or horizontally. Similar to the sword member image ASI shown in FIG. 56, the sword member image ASI shown in FIG. You can do it.

[Modification 3]
The timers of the timer images TN in FIGS. 53 to 56 are of the countdown type, but may be of the countup type. Further, the timer image TN does not have to overlap the operation section images such as the button image BB and the sword member image ASI.

[Modification 4]
The display contents of the operation portion image protrusion movement effects A to D shown in FIGS. 53 to 56 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. Also, the operating section image protrusion movement effects A to D may not include some of the effects shown in FIGS. 53 to 56, or may include other effects. Further, the operating portion image protruding movement effects A to D are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 53 to 56 with respect to the positions and moving directions of the operating portion images, decorative symbols, and pending icons, and may be arbitrary positions and moving directions.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A3-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image representing an appearance of the operation means;
a first display in which part of the first image is displayed on the display means such that parts corresponding to both ends of the operation means protrude from the display means; , after the first display, a portion of the first image is displayed so that only a portion of the first image corresponding to one end of the operation means protrudes from the display means; A second display is displayed, and after the second display, only a portion of the first image corresponding to the other end of the operation means protrudes from the display means. and a third display in which a portion of the first image is displayed.
[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
in the second display, a portion of the first image is displayed at a first position of the display means;
A gaming machine, wherein in the third display, a portion of the first image is displayed at a second position away from the first position in a first direction.
[Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2,
A gaming machine, wherein a portion of the first image displayed in the second display is displayed in a smaller size than a portion of the first image displayed in the first display.
[Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3,
A gaming machine, wherein a portion of the first image displayed in the first display changes in shape to represent a state in which the operation means is rotated.
[Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-4,
A game machine characterized in that, in the third display, a timer image is displayed on the display means.
[Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-5,
The gaming machine, wherein in the third display, the timer image is displayed overlapping a part of the first image.

57 to 59, the operation section image protrusion display effect will be described. This operating section image protruding display effect can be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols or during a ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute the operation unit image protruding display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103. This is a display effect displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Operating part image protruding display effect A]
57A and 57B are diagrams for explaining the operation section image overflow display effect A. FIG. In the operating section image protrusion display effect A, first, the pending icon movement effect of FIG. 57(A) is executed. This pending icon movement effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect of decorative symbols, for example. Here, the pending images (suspended icons) 9A and 9B and the pending digested image (the pending icon) 9C move rightward and out of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57B, a button image BB representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(C), the button image BB is enlarged and displayed. At this time, portions of the button image BB corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button 63 are out of the frame (protruding) from the display screen 7a. In other words, a portion of the button image BB is displayed such that the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button protrude from the display screen 7a. A part of the button image BB overlaps with the production pattern.

Next, the button operation prompting effect shown in FIG. 57(D) is executed. Specifically, in a state in which the button image BB is displayed enlarged and the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button 63 are out of the frame of the display screen 7a, the player is prompted to operate the effect button 63. is displayed on the button image BB.

[Operating part image protruding display effect B]
58A and 58B are diagrams for explaining the operation portion image overflow display effect B. FIG. The operation part image protrusion display effect B differs from the operation part image protrusion display effect A in FIG. 57 in the frame-out range from the display screen 7a when the button image BB is enlarged and displayed. FIGS. 58A and 58B are the same as FIGS. 57A and 57B.

As shown in FIG. 58(C), the button image BB is enlarged and displayed. At this time, in the button image BB, the portion corresponding to the annular receiving portion provided around the projecting portion, rather than the projecting portion (projecting portion) of the effect button 63, is framed out of the display screen 7a ( sticking out). The effect button 63 includes not only the projection but also an annular receiving part around the projection. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 58(C) as well, it can be said that portions of the button image BB corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button 63 are out of the frame (protruding) from the display screen 7a. After that, the button operation prompting effect shown in FIG. 58(D) is executed. Specifically, in a state in which the button image BB is enlarged and the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button 63 are out of the frame of the display screen 7a, the button operation prompting image OPI and the timer bar TBI are displayed. It is displayed on the button image BB.

[Operating part image protruding display effect C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the operating section image protrusion display effect C. As shown in FIG. The operation part image protrusion display effect C differs from the operation part image protrusion display effect A of FIG. 57 in the frame-out range from the display screen 7a when the button image BB is enlarged and displayed. FIGS. 59A and 59B are the same as FIGS. 57A and 57B.

As shown in FIG. 59(C), the button image BB is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the portion of the button image BB that corresponds to the left end of the effect button 63 is out of the frame (protrudes) from the display screen 7a. After that, the button operation prompting effect shown in FIG. 59(D) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the button image BB is enlarged and the portion corresponding to the left end of the effect button 63 is framed out of the display screen 7a, the button operation prompting image OPI and the timer bar TBI are displayed on the button. displayed on the image BB.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation section image protrusion display effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57(D), 58(D), and 59(D), a portion of the button image BB corresponding to at least one end of the effect button 63 is displayed. button image BB is displayed on the display screen 7a so that the timer bar TBI is displayed on the display screen 7a. ing. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57(D) and 58(D), in the first effect, portions of the button image BB corresponding to both ends of the effect button 63 are displayed on the display screen. A portion of the button image BB is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to protrude from the screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57(D), 58(D), and 59(D), the timer bar TBI overlaps a portion of the button image BB in the first effect. Is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, in the first effect, a decoration pattern is displayed overlapping part of the button image BB. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the operation section image protrusion display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, the effect is performed using the button image BB representing the appearance of the effect button 63. FIG. Further, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, an effect using a sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64 is performed. However, the game machine 1 may perform the same effect using an image representing the appearance of a type of operation unit other than the effect button 63, such as the sword member 64, for example. Also, an image of an arbitrary operation unit such as a handle image, a lever image, or a trigger image may be used. In addition to the image of the operation unit, any image such as specific characters, figures, symbols, or character images may be used.

[Modification 2]
The button image BB shown in FIGS. 57 to 59 may change its shape so as to represent the state in which the effect button 63 is rotated vertically or horizontally.

[Modification 3]
The display contents of the operation portion image protrusion display effects A to C shown in FIGS. 57 to 59 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. Further, the operation section image protruding display effects A to C may not include some of the effects shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, or may include other effects. Further, the operating section image protruding display effects A to C are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 57 to 59 with respect to the positions and moving directions of the operating section images, decorative patterns, and pending icons, and may be arbitrary positions and moving directions.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A4-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image representing an appearance of the operation means;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second image representing an operation reception period of the operation means;
a state in which part of the first image is displayed on the display means such that a portion of the first image corresponding to at least one end of the operation means protrudes from the display means; , a gaming machine capable of executing a first effect in which the second image is displayed on the display means.
[Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to A4-1,
In the first effect, a portion of the first image is displayed on the display means such that portions corresponding to both ends of the operation means protrude from the display means. is displayed.
[Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to A4-1 or A4-2,
The gaming machine, wherein in the first effect, the second image is displayed overlapping a part of the first image.
[Aspect A4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of A4-1 to A4-3,
A gaming machine, wherein in the first display, a decorative pattern is displayed so as to overlap a portion of the first image.

60 to 63, the suspension icon/operation section image movement effect will be described. This pending icon/operation unit image moving effect can be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols or during a ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the pending icon/operation unit image moving effect is included, the corresponding image data is transferred from the ROM 103. This is a display effect for reading out and displaying on the display screen 7a.

[Holding icon/operation panel image movement effect A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the suspended icon/operation unit image movement effect A. FIG. As shown in FIG. 60(A), pending images (pending icons) 9A and 9B and a pending digested image (the relevant pending icon) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a, and a production button 63 (Fig. A button image BI1 representing the appearance of 1) is displayed. In this state, when the ready-to-win effect by the effect symbol is started, the suspended icon moving effect shown in FIG. 60(B) is executed. Specifically, the suspended images (suspended icons) 9A and 9B and the suspended digested image (the suspended icon) 9C move rightward and out of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 60(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(D), after the pending icons 9A, 9B, and 9C disappear from the display screen 7a, the button image BI1 moves rightward from the lower left position of the display screen 7a, and E) stops at the bottom right of the display screen 7a. That is, the button image BI1 moves to and stops at the positions where the pending images (suspended icons) 9A and 9B and the pending digested image (the pending icon) 9C were displayed in FIG. 60(A). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60(F), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed in a state where the button image BI1 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative pattern is displayed in reduced size and moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the character image CRA is displayed.

[Holding icon/operation panel image movement effect B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the suspended icon/operation unit image movement effect B. FIG. The pending icon/operation unit image movement effect B is different from the pending icon/operation unit image movement effect A in FIG. The operation mode of the button image BB is different.

As shown in FIG. 61(A), pending images (pending icons) 9A and 9B and a pending digested image (the pending icon) 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a production button 63 ( A button image BI1 representing the appearance of FIG. 1) is displayed. In this state, when the ready-to-win effect by the effect symbol is started, the holding icon moving effect shown in FIG. 61(B) is executed. Specifically, of the pending images (holding icons) 9A and 9B and the pending digested image (the pending icon) 9C, only the pending icon) 9B moves rightward, and as shown in FIG. Frame out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(D), the button image BI1 moves downward from the position near the middle of the right side of the display screen 7a, and stops at the lower right of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 61(E). . That is, the button image BI1 moves to the position where the pending image (suspended icon) 9B was displayed in FIG. 61(A) and stops. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61(F), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed in a state where the button image BI1 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative pattern is displayed in reduced size and moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the character image CRA is displayed.

[Holding icon/operation panel image movement effect C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon/operation unit image movement effect C. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 62(A), a reserved display area image HA is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. On the reserved display area image HA, reserved images (holding icons) 9A and 9B and a reserved digested image (the reserved icon) 9C is displayed. In this state, when the ready-to-win effect by the effect pattern is started, the sword member image appearance effect shown in FIG. 62(B) is executed. Specifically, a sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) appears from above the display screen 7a and moves downward. After that, as shown in FIG. 62(C), the sword tip portion of the sword member image ASI overlaps with the reserved display area image HA and disappears. That is, it is displayed as if the sword tip of the sword member image ASI is stuck in the reserved display area image HA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(D), the entire suspension display area image H including the suspension images (suspension icons) 9A and 9B and the suspension digested image (the suspension icon) 9C is moved downward and displayed. The sword member image ASI moves downward from near the left center of the display screen 7a as the screen 7a is framed out. After that, the sword member image ASI stops at the bottom left of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 62(E). That is, as shown in FIGS. 62(D) and (E), the suspended images (suspended icons) 9A and 9B and the suspended digested image (the suspended icon) 9C move downward and frame out from the display screen 7a, At the same time, the sword member image ASI moves to the position where the pending images (suspended icons) 9A and 9B and the pending digested image (the pending icon) 9C were displayed in FIG. 62(C) and stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 62(F), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed with the sword member image ASI displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative pattern is displayed in reduced size and moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the character image CRA is displayed.

[Holding icon/operation panel image movement effect D]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the suspended icon/operation unit image movement effect D. FIG. In FIG. 63(A), similarly to FIG. 62(A), a reserved display area image HA is displayed below the display screen 7a, and reserved images (holding icons) 9A, 9B and A pending digested image (the pending icon) 9C is displayed. In this state, when the ready-to-win effect by the effect pattern is started, the sword member image appearance effect shown in FIG. 63(B) is executed. Specifically, a sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) appears from above the display screen 7a and moves diagonally to the left. The point of the sword is stopped and displayed out of the display screen 7a. That is, the sword tip of the sword member image ASI is displayed as if stuck in the left end portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 63(C) and 63(D), the entire suspended display area image H including the suspended images (suspended icons) 9A and 9B and the suspended digested image (the suspended icon) 9C moves leftward. It moves and frames out from the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 63(E), a sword member image moving effect is executed in which the sword member image ASI moves downward from near the left center of the display screen 7a and then stops. That is, in the sword member image movement effect, the sword member image ASI is moved to the position where the pending images (suspended icons) 9A and 9B and the pending digested image (the pending icon) 9C were displayed in FIG. 63(B). and stop. After that, as shown in FIG. 63(F), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed with the sword member image ASI displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative pattern is displayed in reduced size and moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the character image CRA is displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending icon/operation unit image moving effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60(A), the pending images (suspended icons) 9A and 9B and the pending digested image (the pending icon) 9C are displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. , a first effect in which the button image BI1 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 60(D), the button image BI1 moves from the lower left to the lower right of the display screen 7a, and stops at the positions where the pending icons 9A, 9B and the pending icon 9C were. It is configured to be executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61(A), pending images (holding icons) 9A and 9B and a holding digested image (the holding icon) 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. 61(B), the hold icon 9B moves to the right, and the button image BI1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 61(D). A second effect of moving from near the center right of the screen 7a to the lower right and stopping at the position where the hold icon 9B was, is configured to be executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62(C), pending images (holding icons) 9A and 9B and a holding digested image (the holding icon) 9C are displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a. 62(D), the holding icons 9A, 9B, the holding icon 9C, and the sword member image ASI move downward and hold It is configured to be able to execute a second effect of stopping at the position where the icons 9A, 9B and the pending icon 9C were. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63(B), pending images (pending icons) 9A and 9B and a pending digested image (the pending icon) 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a sword is displayed at the left end of the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 63(C), the suspension icons 9A, 9B, and the suspension icon 9C are moved to the left in the first effect in which the component image ASI is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 63(E). , the sword member image ASI moves downward and stops at the position where the suspension icons 9A, 9B and the suspension icon 9C were. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, the pending icon is displayed on the display screen 7a along with another image (for example, the operation unit image), and the pending icon moves and the other image is displayed. Move to the position where the hold icon was. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, the operation unit images such as the button image BI1 and the sword member image ASI are displayed on the display screen 7a along with other images (for example, a hold icon). As the other image moves, the operation section image moves to the position where the other image was. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 63, the operation unit images such as the button image BI1 and the sword member image ASI are moved after the pending icons 9A, 9B, and 9C disappear from the display screen 7a. to start. Further, as shown in FIG. 61, the button image BI1 starts moving after the pending icon 9B disappears from the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 62, the operation unit images such as the button image BI1 and the sword member image ASI move to the position where the pending icon was located after the pending icon is moved. Stop at that position. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the button image BI1 moves in a direction different from the moving direction of the pending icon. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
A modification of the pending icon/operation unit image movement effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7a together with the operation unit image (here, the button image BI1 or the sword member image ASI). The image moves to where the hold icon was. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform a similar effect by using a hold icon and a specific image other than the operation unit image. A specific image is an image including arbitrary characters such as character images, graphics, symbols, and the like. That is, the gaming machine 1 executes an effect in which the suspended icon is displayed on the display screen 7a together with a specific image other than the operation unit image, and the suspended icon moves and the specific image moves to the position where the suspended icon was. good too. With this configuration as well, it is possible to impress the player with a novel presentation, and to improve interest.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, the operation unit images such as the button image BI1 and the sword member image ASI are displayed on the display screen 7a together with the pending icon. Move to the position where the icon was. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect by using the operation unit image and a specific image other than the hold icon. A specific image is an image including arbitrary characters such as character images, graphics, symbols, and the like. That is, the game machine 1 displays a specific image other than the hold icon on the display screen 7a together with the operation unit image, and executes an effect in which the specific image moves and the operation unit image moves to the position where the specific image was. You may With this configuration as well, it is possible to impress the player with a novel presentation, and to improve interest.

[Modification 3]
The gaming machine 1 may perform a similar effect by using a first specific image other than the hold icon and a second specific image other than the operation section image. That is, in the gaming machine 1, the first specific image other than the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7a together with the second specific image other than the operation section image, and as the first specific image moves, the second specific image is displayed as the first specific image. You may perform the production|presentation which moves to the position where the image existed. The first specific image and the second specific image are images including arbitrary characters such as character images, graphics, symbols, and the like. With this configuration as well, it is possible to impress the player with a novel performance, and to improve interest.

[Modification 4]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, an effect is performed using an operating portion image representing the appearance of the effect button 63 or the sword member 64. FIG. However, the gaming machine 1 may use an image representing the appearance of a type of operation unit other than the above as the operation unit image. For example, the operating section image may be an image of any operating section such as a steering wheel image, a lever image, or a trigger image.

[Modification 5]
The display contents of the pending icon/operation section image movement effects A to D shown in FIGS. 60 to 63 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. Further, the pending icon/operation unit image movement effects A to D may not include some of the effects shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, or may include other effects. In addition, pending icon/operation section image movement effects A to D are not limited to those shown in FIGS. good.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second image;
a first effect in which the second image is displayed at a second position in a state where the first image is displayed at the first position of the display means; a second effect in which the second image moves from the second position to the first position while moving in the first direction from the position of .
[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
A gaming machine, wherein the first image is a pending icon.
[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2 further comprises
Equipped with operating means that can be operated by the operator,
The gaming machine, wherein the second image is an image representing an appearance of the operating means.
[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-3,
In the second effect, after the first image moves from the first position in the first direction and disappears from the display means, the second image moves from the second position to the A game machine characterized by starting to move to a first position.
[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4,
A gaming machine, wherein in the second effect, the second image stops at the first position after moving from the second position to the first position.
[Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-5,
A gaming machine, wherein in the second effect, the second image moves in a second direction different from the first direction.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can also be realized in the following aspects.
[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second image;
a first effect in which the second image is displayed at a second position in a state where the first image is displayed at the first position of the display means; a second effect in which the second image moves from the second position in the first direction while moving in the second direction from the second position.
[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
A gaming machine, wherein the first image is a pending icon.
[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2 further comprises
Equipped with operating means that can be operated by the operator,
The gaming machine, wherein the second image is an image representing an appearance of the operating means.
[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-3,
In the second effect, the second image is displayed in the second direction after the first image moves from the first position in the first direction and disappears from the display means. A gaming machine characterized by starting movement.
[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-4,
The gaming machine, wherein in the second effect, the second image moves from the second position to the first position.
[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-5,
The game machine, wherein in the second effect, the second image stops at the first position after moving from the second position to the first position.

The pending icon/operation unit image superimposition effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. FIG. This suspended icon/operation unit image superimposition effect can be executed during execution of the variable effect, especially immediately before the start of the variation of the decorative symbols or immediately after the stop display. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the variable effect start command from the sub-control board 90, it is executed based on the content of the variable effect start command and the previously received pending ball number command.

[Holding icon/operation unit image superimposed effect A]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon/operation unit image superimposition effect A. FIG. As shown in FIG. 64(A), suspended images (suspended icons) 9A and 9B and a suspended digested image (the suspended icon) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a, and a production button 63 (see FIG. 64A) is displayed above them. A button image BI1 representing the appearance of 1) is displayed. In this state, when the effect symbol is stopped displayed (determined display) and the suspended icon disappears, the first suspended icon movement start effect shown in FIG. 64(B) is executed. Specifically, the rightmost first pending icon 9A in the pending image (holding icon) 9A moves diagonally upward to the right. That is, it moves toward the button image BI1. The first pending icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1 at the position of the button image BI1, and the overlapping portion becomes invisible. As described above, in this specification, "images overlap" means that they appear to be overlapped from the player's point of view, and whether or not they actually overlap is irrelevant. For example, when at least part of the first pending icon 9A displayed on the display screen 7a appears to be missing due to the button image BI1, it can be said that the images overlap.

Next, the first pending icon invisible effect shown in FIG. 64(C) is executed. Specifically, due to the movement of the first pending icon 9A, the entire first pending icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1, and the entire 1 pending icon 9A becomes invisible. Next, the first pending icon appearance effect shown in FIG. 64(D) is executed. Specifically, the first pending icon 9A appears from a portion of the button image BI1 while moving in the lower right direction. Thereafter, the holding position movement completion effect shown in FIG. 64(E) is executed. Specifically, the first pending icon that appears from a portion of the button image BI1 moves right down and stops at the pending position where the pending icon 9C is arranged. After that, as shown in FIG. 64(F), the variable performance of decorative symbols is started.

[Holding icon/operation unit image superimposed effect B]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon/operation unit image superimposition effect B. FIG. The suspended icon/operation unit image superimposed effect B differs from the superimposed effect A of FIG. 64 in that the suspended image (suspended icon) 9B is not displayed and the position of the button image BB.

As shown in FIG. 65(A), a pending image (a pending icon) 9A and a pending digested image (the pending icon) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a, and the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed. A button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed between the holding position and the holding position. In this state, when the effect symbol is stopped displayed (determined display) and the suspended icon disappears, the first suspended icon movement start effect shown in FIG. 65(B) is executed. Specifically, the rightmost first pending icon 9A in the pending image (suspended icon) 9A moves rightward. That is, it moves toward the button image BI1. The first pending icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1 on the left side of the button image BI1, and the overlapped portion becomes invisible.

Next, the first pending icon invisible effect shown in FIG. 65(C) is executed. Specifically, by moving the first suspended icon 9A to the right, the entire first suspended icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1, and the entire 1 suspended icon 9A becomes invisible. Next, the first pending icon appearance effect shown in FIG. 65(D) is executed. Specifically, the first pending icon 9A appears while moving rightward from the right side of the button image BI1. That is, the first reserved icon 9A appears from the opposite side (right side of the button image BI1) to the position (left side of the button image BI1) before being hidden by the button image BI1. Thereafter, the holding position movement completion effect shown in FIG. 65(E) is executed. Specifically, the first suspended icon that appears from the right end of the button image BI1 moves rightward and stops at the suspended position where the suspended icon is arranged. After that, as shown in FIG. 65(F), the variable performance of decorative symbols is started.

[Holding icon/operation unit image superimposed effect C]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon/operation unit image superimposition effect C. As shown in FIG. In the pending icon/operation unit image superimposed effect C, the pending icon 9C is not displayed, and the button image BB is the pending position.

As shown in FIG. 66A, a hold icon 9A and a button image BI1 are displayed below the display screen 7a. In this state, when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display), the first pending icon movement start effect shown in FIG. 66(B) is executed. Specifically, the rightmost first pending icon 9A in the pending image (suspended icon) 9A moves rightward. That is, it moves toward the button image BI1. The first pending icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1 on the left side of the button image BI1, and the overlapped portion becomes invisible.

Next, the first pending icon invisible effect shown in FIG. 66(C) is executed. Specifically, by moving the first suspended icon 9A to the right, the entire first suspended icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1, and the entire 1 suspended icon 9A becomes invisible. Next, the button image lighting effect shown in FIG. 66(D) is executed. Specifically, the button image BI1 emits light in a specific color in order to indicate a state equivalent to the case where the suspension icon is positioned at the suspension position. This button image light emission effect is equivalent to the holding position movement completion effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 66(E), the variable performance of decorative symbols is started.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending icon/operation unit image superimposition effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, the first effect in which the first pending icon 9A and the button image BI1 are displayed, and the first pending icon 9A is displayed at the position of the button image BI1. A second effect in which the button image BI1 is overlapped with the button image BI1 at the position of the button image BI1 and becomes invisible can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, after the second effect in which the first pending icon 9A overlaps with the button image BI1 and disappears, the first pending icon 9A disappears from the button image BI1. It is configured to be able to execute the third effect that appears. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, in the third effect in which the first suspended icon 9A appears from the button image BI1, the first suspended icon 9A is displayed in the button image BI1 as the first suspended icon before movement. It is configured to emerge from the opposite side (right side) to the side opposite (left side) where 9A was. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, after the third effect in which the first pending icon 9A appears from the button image BI1, the first pending icon 9A stops at the pending position. 4 productions can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, the pending icon overlaps with another image (here, the button image BI1) to make it invisible, thereby improving interest. be able to.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, another image (in this case, the hold icon) moves toward the button image BI1, and the other image appears to overlap the button image BI1. Since the performance that disappears is executed, the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the pending icon/operation unit image superimposition effect will be described below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, there is a first effect in which the first pending icon 9A and the button image BI1 are displayed, and the first pending icon 9A moves toward the position of the button image BI1. A second effect in which the button image BI1 overlaps with the button image BI1 at the position of the button image BI1 and becomes invisible can be executed. However, in the gaming machine 1, a specific image other than the hold icon 9A is displayed together with the operation part image (here, the button image BI1), the specific image moves toward the position of the operation part image, and the operation part image moves toward the position of the operation part image. An effect may be executed in which the operation unit image overlaps with the position and becomes invisible. A specific image is an image including arbitrary characters such as character images, figures, symbols, and the like. With this configuration as well, it is possible to impress the player with a novel performance, and to improve interest.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, there is a first effect in which the first pending icon 9A and the button image BI1 are displayed, and the first pending icon 9A moves toward the position of the button image BI1. A second effect in which the button image BI1 overlaps with the button image BI1 at the position of the button image BI1 and becomes invisible can be executed. However, in the gaming machine 1, the first suspended icon 9A is displayed together with a specific image other than the operation unit image, the first suspended icon 9A moves toward the position of the specific image, and the specific image is displayed at the position of the specific image. You may perform the production|presentation which overlaps with an image and becomes invisible. A specific image is an image including arbitrary characters such as character images, figures, symbols, and the like. With this configuration as well, it is possible to impress the player with a novel presentation, and to improve interest.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiments, the button image BI1 is shown as an example of the operation portion image in FIGS. 64 to 66, but an operation portion image other than the button image may be used. The operating section image may be, for example, a sword member image, a sword button image, or a select button image.

[Modification 4]
The display contents of the suspended icon/operation unit image superimposed effects A to C shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. Further, the pending icon/operation unit image superimposed effects A to C may not include some of the effects shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, or may include other effects. In addition, the pending icon/operation unit image superimposition effects A to C are not limited to FIGS. good.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second image;
a first effect in which the second image is displayed at a second position in a state where the first image is displayed at the first position of the display means; a second effect in which the image moves from the position toward the second position and overlaps with the second image at the second position and becomes invisible.
[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1 further comprises
A game machine characterized by being capable of executing a third effect in which the first image appears from the second image after the second effect.
[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2,
The gaming machine, wherein the first image of the third effect appears from the side opposite to the side facing the first position in the second image.
[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect B3-2 or Aspect B3-3 further comprises
A game machine characterized by being capable of executing a fourth effect in which the first image stops at a third position after the third effect.
[Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-4,
A gaming machine, wherein the first image is a pending icon.
[Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-5 further comprises
Equipped with operating means that can be operated by the operator,
The gaming machine, wherein the second image is an image representing an appearance of the operating means.

The suspension icon non-display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 69. FIG. This pending icon non-display effect can be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols or a ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect). Specifically, it can be displayed as one of the look-ahead effects executed by the image control microcomputer 101 upon receiving a pre-change end command from the sub-control board 90 .

[Hold icon non-display effect A]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon non-display effect A. FIG. As shown in FIG. 67(A), four panel images PN are displayed in an area where a pending image (a pending icon) 9A is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. A pending icon 9A is displayed on each of these four panel images PN. Here, since there are three pending icons 9A, the pending icon 9A is displayed in each of the first to third panel images PN from the right in the display area of the pending icon 9A, and the leftmost panel image PN , the hold icon 9A is not displayed. Hereinafter, in the panel represented by the panel image PN, the surface on which the pending icon 9A is displayed is referred to as "front surface", and the opposite surface is also referred to as "back surface". Note that, in FIG. 67A, the hold icon 9C is also displayed on a panel image different from the panel image PN.

At a specific timing during fluctuation, the panel rotation effect shown in FIG. 67(B) is executed. Specifically, among the panel images PN on which the hold icon 9A is displayed (here, among the four panel images PN, the first to third panel images PN from the right), in any panel image PN, the panel The image changes so that the is rotated horizontally. Then, the pending icon non-display effect shown in FIG. 67(C) is executed. Specifically, the panel image PN in which the image is changed so that the panel is rotated horizontally becomes an image in which the panel is turned face down. That is, the panel image PN is an image in which the surface (back surface) of the panel surface opposite to the side on which the pending icon 9A is displayed is displayed. As a result, the pending icon 9A displayed on this panel image PN is put into a non-display state. That is, in the display area of the pending icon 9A on the display screen 7a, the pending icon is visible when the front image is displayed, and is invisible when the back image is displayed.

Next, the panel rotation effect shown in FIG. 68(D) is executed. Specifically, the panel image PN in which the pending icon 9A is not displayed is changed so that the horizontal rotation of the panel continues as it is, and then the panel image PN rotates around once, and then the panel image PN on the side where the pending icon 9A was displayed is displayed again. (front side) is displayed as an image. At this time, as shown in FIG. 68(E), the hold icon 9A changes (hold change). FIG. 68(F) shows a shift effect. After the decorative pattern is displayed, the suspended icons 9A displayed on each panel image PN are moved one by one to the right panel image PN. The pending icon 9A displayed on the rightmost panel image PN moves to the panel image where the pending is displayed and is displayed on that panel.

[Hold icon non-display effect B]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining pending icon non-display effect B. FIG. The pending icon non-display effect B differs from the non-display effect A in FIG. 67 in that a frame area image HA is displayed around the panel image PN. As shown in FIG. 68(A), a frame area image HA is displayed in an area where a pending image (a pending icon) 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed in the lower portion of the display screen 7a. Four panel images PN are displayed in the area where the pending icon 9A is displayed in the frame area image HA. One panel image is displayed in the area where the hold icon 9C is displayed in the frame area image HA. In other words, the area where the pending icon 9A is displayed is divided into four by the frame area image HA. The pending icon 9A is displayed on each of the four panel images PN arranged in the area defined by the frame area image HA. In the display area of the pending icon 9A, the pending icon 9A is displayed on each of the first to third panel images PN from the right, and the pending icon 9A is not displayed on the leftmost panel image PN. The operation of each panel image PN is the same as that of the non-display effect A in FIG. 67, so the explanation is omitted.

[Hold icon non-display effect C]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon non-display effect C. FIG. The pending icon non-display effect C differs from the non-display effect A in FIG. 67 in that the pupil frame image EF is displayed instead of the panel image PN. As shown in FIG. 69(A), four pupil frame images EF are displayed in a region where a pending image (a pending icon) 9A is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A is displayed inside the pupil frame image EF. The pending icon 9A displayed inside the pupil frame image EF is displayed so as to be the iris portion of the pupil. Here, since there are three pending icons 9A, the pending icon 9A is displayed in each of the first to third pupil frame images EF from the right in the display area of the pending icon 9A, and the leftmost pupil frame image is displayed. The hold icon 9A is not displayed in EF. Hereinafter, the state in which the eyelids represented by the pupil frame image EF are open and the hold icon 9A is displayed is referred to as an "eyelid open state", and the state in which the eyelids are closed and the hold icon 9A is invisible is also referred to as a "closed eyelid state". . Here, the hold icon 9C is also displayed on a separate pupil frame image different from the pupil frame image EF.

At a specific timing during the change, the closed eyelid effect shown in FIG. 69(B) is executed. Specifically, among the pupil frame images EF displaying the pending icon 9A (here, among the four pupil frame images EF, the first to third pupil frame images EF from the right), any pupil frame image In EF, the image changes so that the eyelid image appears and the eye closes. Then, the pending icon non-display effect shown in FIG. 69(C) is executed. Specifically, the pupil frame image EF in which the image is changed so as to close the eyes becomes an image in a state in which the eyes are completely closed by the eyelids (eyelid closed state). That is, the pupil frame image EF is an image in which the reserved icon 9A of the black eye portion is completely hidden by the eyelid. As a result, the hold icon 9A displayed in the pupil frame image EF is put into a non-display state.

Next, the eyelid opening effect shown in FIG. 69(D) is executed. Specifically, the pupil frame image EF in the state where the eyes are completely closed by the eyelids (closed eyelid state) changes so that the eyelids open again. When the eyelid-closed state changes to the eyelid-open state, the hold icon 9A changes (hold change) as shown in FIG. 69(E). FIG. 69(F) shows a shift effect. After the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed, the pending icons 9A displayed in each pupil frame image EF move one by one to the right pupil frame image EF. The suspension icon 9A displayed in the rightmost pupil frame image EF moves to the pupil frame image in which the suspension is displayed, and is displayed as the iris portion of the pupil frame image.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending icon non-display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, in the display area of the pending icon 9A, when the panel image PN is displaying the surface of the panel, the pending icon 9A can be displayed. When the back side of the panel is displayed, the pending icon 9A disappears. Further, as shown in FIG. 69, in the display area of the hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A can be displayed when the pupil frame image EF is in the eyelid open state, and the hold icon 9A is invisible when the eyelid is closed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, when the pending icon 9A is displayed while the panel image PN is displaying the surface of the panel, the pending icon 9A is displayed on the panel An image PN is displayed overlapping part of the surface of the panel. Further, as shown in FIG. 69, when the hold icon 9A is displayed when the pupil frame image EF is in the eyelid open state, the hold icon 9A overlaps a portion of the pupil frame image EF (the white portion of the eye). Is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the pending icon 9A is displayed on the panel image PN representing the front surface of the panel, and then the panel image PN is switched to display the back surface of the panel. A first effect in which the pending icon 9A becomes invisible can be executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 69, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the pupil frame image EF representing the eyelid open state, and then the pupil frame image EF is switched to display the eyelid closed state, and the hold icon 9A disappears. can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, after the first effect in which the pending icon 9A disappears, the panel image PN is switched from the back surface of the panel to the front surface, and the invisible pending icon 9A is displayed. A second effect in which the icon 9A is displayed again can be executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 69, after the first effect in which the pending icon 9A is hidden, the pupil frame image EF is switched from the closed eyelid state to the open eyelid state, and the invisible pending icon 9A is displayed again. A second effect can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, when the suspended icon 9A that has disappeared is displayed again, the suspended icon 9A is changed from the state before it disappeared (suspended change). executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, each display area of the hold icon 9A is defined by a frame area image HA. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
A modification of the pending icon non-display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
Although the frame area image HA is not displayed in FIG. 69, the frame area image HA may be displayed. Moreover, the structure which opens and closes a shutter instead of an eyelid may be sufficient.

[Modification 2]
The display contents of the pending icon non-display effects A to C shown in FIGS. 67 to 69 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. Further, the pending icon non-display effects A to C may not include some of the effects shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, or may include other effects. Further, the suspended icon non-display effects A to C are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 67 to 69 with respect to the decorative symbols and suspended icon positions and moving directions, and may be arbitrary positions and moving directions.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of pending icons,
one of the first display and the second display can be displayed in each display area where each pending icon is displayed;
The holding icon can be displayed in the display area where the first display is displayed,
A gaming machine, wherein the hold icon is invisible in the display area where the second display is displayed.
[Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the suspended icon is displayed in the display area where the first display is displayed, the suspended icon is displayed overlapping a part of the first display. .
[Aspect B4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B4-1 or aspect B4-2,
After the pending icon is displayed in the display area where the first display is displayed, the display in the display area is switched from the first display to the second display, and the pending icon disappears. 1. A game machine characterized by being capable of executing the production of 1.
[Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3,
After the first effect, the display of the display area is switched from the second display to the first display, and a second effect can be executed in which the invisible pending icon is displayed again. Amusement machine.
[Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-4,
The game machine is characterized in that, in the second effect, an effect is executed in which the suspended icon to be displayed again changes from a state before it disappears.
[Aspect B4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-5,
A gaming machine, wherein each of the display areas is defined by a frame image.

The operation count effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72. FIG. This operation count effect is performed in parallel with the variable effect of decorative symbols. Of course, it includes during execution such as during reach production (super reach production).

[Operation count effect A]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the operation count effect A. FIG.
First, in the operation count effect A, as shown in FIG. 70(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start production, the decoration pattern during fluctuation is displayed on the upper left. Further, pending images 9A and 9B and a pending digested image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The pending images 9A and 9B and the pending digested image 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(B), a sword movement effect is executed. In the sword movement effect, a sword image KG showing the sword member 64 appears on the right side of the screen from above and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70(C), a sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG moving downward in the sword movement effect stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70(D), a count effect (initial) is executed. In the count effect (initial), "5" is displayed in the hilt portion EG of the sword image KG. Then, a countdown is displayed in the order of "5"→"4"→"3"→"2"→"1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(E), a count effect (final stage) is executed. In the count effect (final stage), "0" is displayed in the hilt portion EG of the sword image KG. This is the display following "1" in the countdown display described above.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70(F), a button press instruction effect is executed. In the button press instruction rendering, an image is displayed to instruct pressing of the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 . Specifically, a text image TG saying "Push!" is displayed together with an arrow image YG for instructing the pressing of the button image BG.

[Operation count effect B (success)]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the operation count effect B (success).
First, in the operation count effect B (success), as shown in FIG. 71(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start production, the decoration pattern during fluctuation is displayed on the upper left. Further, pending images 9A and 9B and a pending digested image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The pending images 9A and 9B and the pending digested image 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), a sword movement effect is executed. In the sword movement effect, a sword image KG showing the sword member 64 appears from above on the right side of the screen and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), a sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG moving downward in the sword movement effect moves leftward while rotating clockwise and stops at the lower left corner of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(D), a count effect (initial) is executed. In the count effect (initial), "5" is displayed so as to overlap the button image BG showing the sword button 65. - 特許庁Then, a countdown is displayed in the button image BG in the order of "5"→"4"→"3"→"2"→"1". Also, at this time, the letters "Wait..." are displayed in the hilt portion EG of the sword image KG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(E), a count effect (final stage) is executed. In the count effect (final stage), "0" is displayed in the hilt portion EG of the sword image KG. This is the display following "1" in the countdown display described above. Also at this time, the characters "Wait..." are displayed in the hilt portion EG of the sword image KG.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71(F), a button press instruction effect is executed. In the button press instruction rendering, an image is displayed to instruct pressing of the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 . Specifically, a text image TG saying "Push!" is displayed together with an arrow image YG for instructing the pressing of the button image BG.

[Operation count effect B (failure)]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the operation count effect B (failure).
First, in the operation count effect B (failure), as shown in FIG. 72(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start production, the decoration pattern during fluctuation is displayed on the upper left. Further, pending images 9A and 9B and a pending digested image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The pending images 9A and 9B and the pending digested image 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), a sword movement effect is executed. In the sword movement effect, a sword image KG showing the sword member 64 appears on the right side of the screen from above and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), a sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG that moves downward in the sword movement effect moves leftward while rotating clockwise and stops at the lower left corner of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), a count effect (initial) is executed. In the count effect (initial), "5" is displayed so as to overlap the button image BG showing the sword button 65. - 特許庁Then, a countdown is displayed in the manner of "5"→"4" in the portion of the button image BG. Also, at this time, the letters "Wait..." are displayed in the hilt portion EG of the sword image KG.
72(A) to 72(D) are the same effects as the operation count effect B (success) shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(E), a count effect (mid-term) is executed. In the count effect (mid-term), "3" is displayed in the hilt portion EG of the sword image KG. This is the display following "4" in the countdown display described above. Also at this time, the characters "Wait..." are displayed in the hilt portion EG of the sword image KG.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72(F), a variable continuation effect is executed. In the variable continuation effect, the sword image KG is not displayed, and the effect is the same as the variable start effect shown in FIG. 72(A). That is, the countdown display is interrupted at "3" and the same effect as the variable start effect is performed.

[Effect example]
Examples of the effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, a part of the sword image KG showing the sword member 64 is used to display the countdown. When the display of this countdown becomes "0", a button-press instruction effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 70(E) and 71(E). According to this configuration, by displaying the countdown using a part of the sword image KG, it is possible to make the player expect to operate the sword button 65, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the countdown is displayed by superimposing the sword image KG on the button image BG. When the countdown display becomes "0", a button-pressing instruction effect is executed as shown in FIG. 71(E). According to this configuration, the operation of the sword button 65 can be expected by counting down over the button image BG, and interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, a countdown is displayed superimposed on the button image BG of the sword image KG, and "Wait..." is displayed on the hilt portion EG of the sword image KG. characters are displayed. According to this configuration, the operation of the sword button 65 can be expected, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, when the countdown display superimposed on the button image BG of the sword image KG disappears in the middle, the variable continuous effect shown in FIG. is performed, and the button pressing instruction effect as shown in FIG. 71(E) is not performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give width to the game and improve interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG moving downward in the sword movement effect moves leftward while rotating clockwise and stops at the lower left corner of the screen. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the interest.

[Modification]
Modifications of the present embodiment are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, a part of the sword image KG showing the sword member 64 is used to display the countdown. When the countdown display becomes "0", a button-pressing instruction effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 70(E) and 71(E), but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, even if the countdown display does not become "0", the button pressing instruction effect may be executed.
[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, a part of the sword image KG showing the sword member 64 is used to display the countdown, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, instead of counting down, it may count up.
[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, a part of the sword image KG showing the sword member 64 is used to display the countdown, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the display may not be a display that counts, and it may be configured to display a time such as "5 seconds remaining" at a certain timing.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B5-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying an image of the operation means,
A gaming machine characterized in that a part of the image of the operation means is used to display the time until the operation means becomes operable.
[Aspect B5-2]
A gaming machine characterized by displaying a time until the operating means becomes operable, superimposed on an image showing the movable portion of the operating means.
[Aspect B5-3]
In addition to displaying the time until the operation means becomes operable, another part of the image of the operation means is used to display that the operation of the operation means is suspended. Amusement machine.
[Aspect B5-4]
A game machine, wherein the operating means is not operable when the time display ends in the middle.
[Aspect B5-5]
A gaming machine, wherein an image of the operation means is displayed in a corner portion of the display means when displaying a time until the operation means becomes operable.

The timer image movement effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. FIG. This timer image movement effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols or during the ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the timer image moving effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen. This is a display effect displayed on 7a.

[Timer image movement effect A]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the timer image movement effect A. FIG. In the timer image movement effect A, first, the button image display of FIG. 73(A) is executed. This button image display is performed, for example, during the ready-to-win effect of the decorative symbols. Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. A wall image HA is displayed above the first button image BI1. The wall image HA partially overlaps the first button image BI1, and slides leftward at a predetermined timing.

Next, the first timer image display of FIG. 73(B) is executed. Specifically, as the wall image HA slides leftward, the first timer image TN1 appears from the right end of the wall image HA. The first timer image TN1 appearing from the right end of the wall image HA is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position (first position) on the wall image HA, and partially overlaps the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is of a countdown type. Next, the timer image movement effect of FIG. 73(C) is executed. Specifically, as the wall image HA is further slid leftward, the first timer image TN1 moves leftward from the first position. Also, a lighting effect is performed in which the first button image BI1 emits light in a predetermined color, and after the lighting effect starts, the second timer image TN2 appears from the right end of the wall image HA. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is of a countdown type.

Next, the second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 73(D) is executed. Specifically, the second timer image TN2 appearing from the right end of the wall image HA is stopped and displayed at the first position on the wall image HA. At this time, the first timer image TN1 is stopped and displayed at the second position on the wall image HA. As a result, the first timer image TN1 is displayed on the left side of the current wall image HA, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed on the right side of the wall image HA. The first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed at positions adjacent to each other, and partially overlap the first button image BI1.

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation prompting effect shown in FIG. 73(E) is executed. Specifically, in a state in which the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the wall image HA, a character image (button operation) of "Press!" A promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation effective period of the production button 63 are displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 73(F), the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. After that, the production pattern is stop-displayed as a losing pattern.

[Timer image movement effect B]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the timer image movement effect B. FIG. In the timer image movement effect B, first, the button image display of FIG. 74(A) is executed. This button image display is performed, for example, during the ready-to-win effect of decorative symbols, as in FIG. 73(A). Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. A stage image ST is displayed below the first button image BI1, and the image configuration is such that the first button image BI1 is arranged on the stage image ST. The stage image ST and the first button image BI1 are deformed at a predetermined timing such that the button and the stereoscopic image of the stage are horizontally rotated. Hereinafter, this deformation of the image is also referred to as a horizontal rotation presentation.

Next, the first timer image display of FIG. 74(B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 appears from the right side of the stage image ST along with the horizontal rotation effect of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1. A first timer image TN1 appearing from the right side of the stage image ST is displayed on the stage image ST and is adjacent to the first button image BI1. The horizontal rotation effect of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1 is temporarily stopped, and the first timer image TN1 is stopped and displayed at the first position. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is of a countdown type.

Next, the timer image movement effect of FIG. 74(C) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves leftward from the first position as the horizontal rotation effect of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1 resumes. Along with the horizontal rotation effect, a light emission effect in which the first button image BI1 emits light in a predetermined color is performed, and after the start of this light emission effect, the second timer image TN2 appears from the right side of the stage image ST. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is of a countdown type.

Next, the second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 74(D) is executed. Specifically, the second timer image TN2 appearing from the right side of the stage image ST is stopped and displayed at the first position by temporarily stopping the horizontal rotation effect of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1. . At this time, the first timer image TN1 is stopped and displayed at the second position. As a result, the first timer image TN1 is displayed on the left side of the stage image ST, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed on the right side of the stage image ST. The first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed at positions adjacent to each other, and are adjacent to the first button image BI1.

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation prompting effect shown in FIG. 74(E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the stage image ST, a character image (button An operation promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the effective period of operation of the production button 63 are displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 74(F), the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. After that, the production pattern is stop-displayed as a losing pattern.

[Timer image movement effect C]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the timer image movement effect C. FIG. In the timer image movement effect C, first, the button image display of FIG. 75(A) is executed. This button image display is performed, for example, during the ready-to-win effect of decorative symbols, as in FIG. 73(A). Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, the first timer image display of FIG. 75(B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, moves leftward, and is connected to a predetermined position (first position) on the right side of the first button image BI1. The first timer image TN1 at the first position is adjacent to the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is of a countdown type. Next, the timer image movement effect of FIG. 75(C) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves to a predetermined position (second position) below the first button image BI1. Also, a lighting effect is performed in which the first button image BI1 emits light in a predetermined color, and after the lighting effect starts, a second timer image TN2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is of a countdown type.

Next, the second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 75(D) is executed. Specifically, the second timer image TN2 appearing from the right side of the display screen 7a moves leftward and is connected to the first position on the right side of the first button image BI1. The position where the second timer image TN2 is connected is the same as the position where the first timer image TN1 was initially connected. As a result, the first timer image TN1 is displayed at the second position below the first button image BI1, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the first position on the right side of the first button image BI1. The first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed at positions adjacent to each other, and are adjacent to the first button image BI1.

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation prompting effect shown in FIG. 75(E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are connected (adjacent) to the first button image BI1, a character image of "Press!" is displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. (Button operation prompting image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the effective period of operation of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 75(F), the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. After that, the production pattern is stop-displayed as a losing pattern.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer image movement effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 to 75, a first effect in which the first timer image TN1 is displayed while the first button image BI1 is displayed on the display screen 7a; After the first effect, the first timer image TN1 is displayed at another position on the display screen 7a, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the position where the first timer image TN1 was displayed. and are configured to be executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73(B), 74(B), and 75(B), the first timer image TN1 when the first timer image is displayed is the first button image BI1. next to. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73(D), 74(D), and 75(D), the first timer image TN1 when the second timer image is displayed is replaced by the second timer image TN2. Adjacent to. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73(D), 74(D), and 75(D), when the second timer image is displayed, the first timer image TN1 is the first button image BI1. next to. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73(C), 74(C), and 75(C), before the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the first position, the first A lighting effect of the button image BI1 is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 to 75, the first button image BI1 has a shape representing the appearance of the operation section (here, the effect button 63) of the gaming machine 1. there is According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
A modified example of the timer image movement effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 to 75, the first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 and the two timer images TN1 and TN2 are configured to enable execution of effects. However, instead of the first button image BI1, the gaming machine 1 may use an image having a different appearance shape of the operation unit than the effect button 63 to execute a similar effect. Also, the gaming machine 1 may execute a similar effect using a specific image having a shape other than the appearance of the operation unit instead of the first button image BI1. A specific image is an image including arbitrary characters such as character images, graphics, symbols, and the like. In other words, the first button image BI1 may be any image other than the button image. With this configuration as well, it is possible to impress the player with a novel presentation, and to improve interest.

[Modification 2]
The timers of the timer images TN in FIGS. 73 to 75 are of the countdown type, but may be of the countup type. Also, the timer image TN does not have to be adjacent to the button image BB.

[Modification 3]
The display contents of the timer image movement effects A to C shown in FIGS. 73 to 75 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. Also, the timer image movement effects A to C may not include some of the effects shown in FIGS. 73 to 75, or may include other effects. Further, the timer image movement effects A to C are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 73 to 75 with respect to the positions and movement directions of the operation section images, decoration patterns, and pending icons, and may be arbitrary positions and movement directions.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a first timer image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second timer image;
a first effect in which the first timer image is displayed at a first position in a state in which the first image is displayed on the display means; and after the first effect, the first timer. and a second effect in which an image is displayed at a second position and the second timer image is displayed at the first position.
[Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
The gaming machine, wherein in the first effect, the first timer image at the first position is adjacent to the first image.
[Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1 or aspect C1-2,
The gaming machine, wherein in the second effect, the first timer image at the second position is adjacent to the first image.
[Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3,
In the second effect, the first timer image at the second position is adjacent to the second timer image at the first position.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-4,
A gaming machine, wherein in the second effect, a predetermined effect using the first image is performed before the second timer image is displayed at the first position.
[Aspect C1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-5 further comprises
Equipped with operating means that can be operated by the operator,
The gaming machine, wherein the first image is an image representing an appearance of the operating means.

The timer image tilt display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78. FIG. This timer image tilt display effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols or during the ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the timer image tilt display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is a display effect displayed on the screen 7a.

[Timer image tilt display effect A]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the timer image tilt display effect A. FIG. In the timer image tilt display effect A, first, the first timer image display of FIG. 76(A) is executed. This first timer image display is executed, for example, during the ready-to-win effect of decorative symbols. Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower center of the display screen 7a. A first timer image TN1 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a, and a fan-shaped area image SC is displayed over the entire display screen 7a. The area image SC is different in color from the rest of the display screen 7a. The first timer image TN1 is displayed at a lower right predetermined position (first position) on the area image SC. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is of a countdown type.

Next, the first timer image tilt display shown in FIG. 76(B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves to the upper left along the fan-shaped area image SC and is displayed obliquely compared to when it was displayed at the first position. That is, the first timer image TN1 is inclined by a predetermined angle with respect to the first button image BI1. Next, the second timer image display shown in FIG. 76(C) is executed. Specifically, after the first timer image TN1 moves to the upper left from the first position on the area image SC, the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the first position on the area image SC at a predetermined timing. be done. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is of a countdown type. The first timer image TN1 continues to move along the area image SC, and is displayed at an angle of about 90 degrees compared to when it was displayed at the first position.

Next, the second timer image tilt display of FIG. 76(D) is executed. Specifically, like the first timer image TN1, the second timer image TN2 moves to the upper left along the area image SC and is displayed obliquely compared to when it was displayed at the first position. At this time, the first timer image TN1 moves to the lower left along the area image SC and is displayed at an angle of about 90 degrees or more compared to when it was displayed at the first position. Also, the first timer image TN1 executes a predetermined effect such as a light emitting effect or an enlarged effect when the timer value becomes smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 4 seconds).

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation prompting effect shown in FIG. 76(E) is executed. Specifically, in a state in which the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the area image SC, a character image of "Press!" A promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation effective period of the production button 63 are displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 76(F), the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. After that, the production pattern is stop-displayed as a losing pattern.

[Timer image tilt display effect B]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the timer image tilt display effect B. FIG. In the timer image tilt display effect B, first, the first timer image display of FIG. 77(A) is executed. This first timer image display is performed, for example, during the ready-to-win effect of decorative symbols, as in FIG. 76(A). Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower center of the display screen 7a. A first timer image TN1 is displayed at a predetermined position (first position) near the center of the display screen 7a. The first timer image TN1 is positioned above the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is of a countdown type.

Next, the first timer image tilt display shown in FIG. 77(B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 rotates to the left (counterclockwise rotation) at the first position. As a result, the first timer image TN1 is displayed obliquely compared to the state when it appeared on the display screen 7a. In other words, the first timer image TN1 is inclined by a predetermined angle with respect to the first button image BI1. Next, the second timer image display shown in FIG. 77(C) is executed. Specifically, after the first timer image TN1 is displayed, the second timer image TN2 is displayed at a second position near the center on the right side of the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is of a countdown type. The first timer image TN1 continues to rotate counterclockwise and is displayed at the first position at an angle of approximately 90 degrees.

Next, the second timer image tilt display of FIG. 77(D) is executed. Specifically, like the first timer image TN1, the second timer image TN2 rotates to the left (counterclockwise rotation) at the second position and is displayed obliquely compared to the state when it appeared on the display screen 7a. be done. The first timer image TN1 continues to rotate counterclockwise and is displayed tilted by about 90 degrees or more compared to the state when it appeared on the display screen 7a. Also, the first timer image TN1 executes a predetermined effect such as a light emitting effect or an enlarged effect when the timer value becomes smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 4 seconds).

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation prompting effect shown in FIG. 77(E) is executed. Specifically, in a state in which the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the area image SC, a character image of "Press!" A promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation effective period of the production button 63 are displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 77(F), the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. After that, the production pattern is stop-displayed as a losing pattern.

[Timer image tilt display effect C]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the timer image tilt display effect C. FIG. In the timer image tilt display effect C, first, the first timer image display of FIG. 78(A) is executed. This first timer image display is performed, for example, during the ready-to-win effect of decorative symbols, as in FIG. 76(A). Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower center of the display screen 7a. A first timer image TN1 is displayed at a position (first position) adjacent to the right side of the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is of a countdown type.

Next, the first timer image tilt display shown in FIG. 78(B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves to the upper left along the first button image BI1 and is displayed obliquely compared to when it was displayed at the first position. That is, the first timer image TN1 is inclined by a predetermined angle with respect to the first button image BI1. The first timer image TN1 is in contact with the first button image BI1 even during movement. Next, the second timer image display shown in FIG. 78(C) is executed. Specifically, after the first timer image TN1 moves from the first position to the upper left along the first button image BI1, at a predetermined timing, the first timer image TN1 moves to the first position adjacent to the right side of the first button image BI1. , the second timer image TN2 is displayed. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is of a countdown type. The first timer image TN1 continues to move along the first button image BI1, and is displayed at an angle of about 90 degrees compared to when it was displayed at the first position.

Next, the second timer image tilt display of FIG. 78(D) is executed. Specifically, similarly to the first timer image TN1, the second timer image TN2 moves to the upper left along the first button image BI1 and is displayed obliquely compared to when it was displayed at the first position. be. At this time, the first timer image TN1 moves to the lower left along the first button image BI1 and is displayed at an angle of about 90 degrees or more compared to when it was displayed at the first position. Also, the first timer image TN1 executes a predetermined effect such as a light emitting effect or an enlarged effect when the timer value becomes smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 4 seconds).

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation prompting effect shown in FIG. 78(E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 in contact with the first button image BI1 are displayed, a character image of "Press!" is displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. (Button operation prompting image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the effective period of operation of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 78(F), the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. After that, the production pattern is stop-displayed as a losing pattern.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer image tilt display effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76(B), 77(B), and 78(B), the first timer is activated while the first button image BI1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. A first effect in which the image TN1 is displayed tilted by a predetermined angle with respect to the first button image BI1 can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, the first timer image TN1 is adjacent to the first button image BI1 in the first effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the first effects shown in FIGS. 76(B), 77(B) and 78(B), FIGS. As shown in C), it is configured to be able to execute a second effect in which the first timer image TN1 tilted at an angle different from that during the first effect is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, the first button image BI1 has a shape representing the appearance of the operating section (here, the effect button 63) of the gaming machine 1. there is According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the countdown value displayed in the first timer image TN1 reaches a predetermined value, as shown in FIGS. In addition, a third effect in which the size of the first timer image TN1 is changed can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
A modified example of the timer image tilt display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, the first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 and the two timer images TN1 and TN2 are configured to be able to execute effects. However, instead of the first button image BI1, the gaming machine 1 may use an image having a different appearance shape of the operation unit than the effect button 63 to execute a similar effect. Also, the gaming machine 1 may execute a similar effect using a specific image having a shape other than the appearance of the operation unit instead of the first button image BI1. A specific image is an image including arbitrary characters such as character images, graphics, symbols, and the like. In other words, the first button image BI1 may be any image other than the button image. With this configuration as well, it is possible to impress the player with a novel presentation, and to improve interest.

[Modification 2]
The timers of the timer images TN in FIGS. 76 to 78 are of the countdown type, but may be of the countup type. Also, the timer image TN in FIGS. 76 to 78 may or may not be adjacent to the button image BI1. Also, the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 in FIGS. 76 to 78 may or may not be adjacent to each other.

[Modification 3]
The display contents of the timer image tilt display effects A to C shown in FIGS. 76 to 78 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. Also, the timer image tilt display effects A to C may not include some of the effects shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, or may include other effects. Further, the tilted timer image display effects A to C are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 76 to 78 with respect to the positions and moving directions of the operating section images, decoration patterns, and pending icons, and may be arbitrary positions and moving directions.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a timer image;
A game characterized by being capable of executing a first effect in which the timer image is displayed at a predetermined angle with respect to the first image while the first image is displayed on the display means. machine.
[Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
The gaming machine, wherein in the first effect, the timer image is adjacent to the first image.
[Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1 or aspect C2-2,
A gaming machine capable of executing a second effect in which the timer image tilted at an angle different from that during the first effect is displayed after the first effect.
[Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3 further comprises
Equipped with operating means that can be operated by the operator,
The gaming machine, wherein the first image is an image representing an appearance of the operating means.
[Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-4,
A gaming machine capable of executing a third effect in which the size of the timer image changes when the countdown value displayed in the timer image reaches a predetermined value.

The timer button effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 79 to 80. FIG. This timer button effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols (during one variable effect) (for example, during the reach effect (super reach effect)), or during the jackpot game.

[Timer button effect A]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the timer button effect A. FIG.
In the timer button effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 79(A), the first button display effect is executed. In this first button display effect, the button image C3A is displayed. The button image C3A is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is anticipated that the effect using the effect button 63 will be executed from now on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(B), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a timer image C3B and a button image C3A are displayed. The timer image C3B is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. The timer image C3B shown in FIG. 79B shows "50 seconds" as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(C), the second button display effect is executed. In this second button display effect, a button image C3C and a timer image C3B are displayed. The button image C3C is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in the valid operation period. Specifically, the button image C3C is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image representing a state in which the color of the button image C3A is darkened and/or a state in which the button image C3A is lit. is. Adjacent to the button image C3C, the characters "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. FIG. The timer image C3B indicates that the timer value is "0 seconds". The button image C3C is displayed after the timer value of the timer image C3B becomes "0 seconds". The display is not limited to this, and may be displayed after reaching a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before the timer value reaches “0 seconds”. It should be noted that the valid operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image C3C returns to the state of the button image C3A after the valid operation period has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(D), when the player presses the effect button 63, the movable role effect is executed. This accessory movable production is a production in which the board movable body 15 is movably controlled to the unfolded position and arranged on the display screen 7a (the position where the display screen 7a is hidden). This role object movable effect functions as a chance increase.

[Timer button effect B]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining timer button effect B. FIG.
In the timer button effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 80(A), the first button display effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 79(A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(B), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a timer image C3D and a button image C3A are displayed. The timer image C3D is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down, and is arranged within the button image C3A. In the timer image C3D shown in FIG. 80B, "30 seconds" is shown as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(C), the second button display effect is executed. In this second button display effect, a button image C3C and a timer image C3D are displayed. The timer image C3D shows a timer value of "0 seconds" in the button image C3C. The button image C3C is displayed after the timer value of the timer image C3D becomes "0 seconds". The display is not limited to this, and may be displayed after reaching a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before the timer value reaches “0 seconds”. It should be noted that the valid operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image C3C returns to the state of the button image C3A after the valid operation period has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(D), when the player presses the effect button 63, a re-timer display effect is executed. In this re-timer display effect, the timer display is executed again, that is, the timer image C3D and the button image C3A are displayed. In this case, similarly to FIG. 80(B), the timer image C3D is arranged within the button image C3A. In the timer image C3D shown in FIG. 80D, "50 seconds", which is longer than in the case of FIG. 80B, is shown as the timer initial value. As a result, the re-timer display effect can suggest that the expectation for the big win is high.

In the timer display effects of the timer button effects A and B, a plurality of patterns are prepared for the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D. For example, as timer initial values of timer images C3B and C3D, the first pattern is set to 50 seconds and 30 seconds, respectively, as shown in FIGS. They are set to long 70 seconds and 50 seconds, respectively. In this case, when the second pattern is set as the timer initial value of the timer images C3B and C3D, the expectation for the big win is higher than when the first pattern is set. When the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D are displayed in the first pattern and when displayed in the second pattern, they function as a chance-up effect (chance-up display).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer button presentation is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, in the timer button effects A and B, the timer image is displayed while the button image C3A is being displayed, and after the timer image is displayed, , the button image C3C prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed in response to the timer value of the timer image becoming a predetermined value (0 seconds). According to this configuration, the player can recognize the change of the button image from the timer display, and can suppress missing the pressing timing of the effect button 63 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the rate of participation of the players in the game presentation, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer button effects A and B are executed during one variation effect. According to this configuration, since the timer value shifts from the initial value (50 seconds or 30 seconds) to the predetermined value (0 seconds) during one variable effect, the player can see the change in the button image from the timer display without error. It can be recognized, and it is possible to suppress missing the pressing timing of the production button 63. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to improve the rate of participation of the players in the game performance, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, in the timer button effect B, when the button image C3A is being displayed, the timer image C3D is displayed, and after the timer image C3D is displayed, the timer image When the timer value of C3D reaches a predetermined value (0 seconds), a button image C3C prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed, and when the player presses the effect button 63, A re-timer display effect is executed in which the timer image C3D and the button image C3A are displayed again. According to this configuration, the player can recognize the change of the button image from the timer display, can suppress missing the pressing timing of the effect button 63, and the timer display is displayed again after pressing the effect button 63. As it is executed, the player can be given a surprise. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play while improving the participation rate of the player in the game performance. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, in the timer button effect B, the timer image C3D is displayed within the button image C3A. According to this configuration, the timer display can give the player a strong sense of an effect related to the effect button 63 (such as a button-pressing effect), thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the timer button effects A and B, the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D may be displayed in the first pattern or in the second pattern. Each of these functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display). According to this configuration, it is possible to create a chance-up effect with the timer initial value, so it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the timer button effects A and B, the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D may be displayed in the first pattern or in the second pattern. Each of these functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and the expectation of a big win is higher when the second pattern is set than when the first pattern is set. . According to this configuration, the chance-up effect can be created with the timer initial value, and the player can look forward to the appearance of the second pattern as the timer initial value. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the timer button effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, in the timer button effects A and B, the button image C3C is displayed in the second button effect, and the effect button 63 is pressed by the player. In response to the pressing, the accessory movement effect and the re-timer display effect are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the second button effect, even if the player does not press the effect button 63 in spite of the button image C3C being displayed, the character movement effect and the re-timer display effect are executed. good too.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer button effects A and B are executed during one variable effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be executed across a plurality of variable effects.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer button effects shown in FIGS. may be displayed at the same time.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, the timer images C3B and C3D are displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, the timer images C3B and C3D may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value is counted up. In this case, when a predetermined value is reached, the timeout display effect described above can be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the timer button effects A and B, the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D may be displayed in the first pattern or in the second pattern. Each of these functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and the expectation of a big win is higher when the second pattern is set than when the first pattern is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the timer button effects A and B, when the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D are displayed, the timer images may be displayed in a first color (for example, blue) or in a second color ( For example, gold) may be displayed, and each of these functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and the second color is set more than the first color. However, it may be configured such that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, in the timer button effects A and B, the button image C3C is displayed in the second button effect, and the effect button 63 is pressed by the player. In response to the pressing, the accessory movement effect and the re-timer display effect are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the second button effect, the button image C3C is displayed, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a pseudo-continuous effect, a jackpot preview effect, a reach development destination preview effect, and a jackpot expectation level are generated according to the depression. Effect such as suggestion effect, pending change notice, or look-ahead start notice may be executed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C3-1]
effect display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects;
an operation unit operable by a player;
A gaming machine comprising
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a first operation unit image representing the operation unit,
The second display effect is a effect of performing a first timer display,
the third display effect is a effect of displaying a second operation portion image representing the operation portion and prompting the player to operate the operation portion;
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed, and the timer value of the first timer display in the second display effect becomes a predetermined value. Depending on the situation, the third display effect may be performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C3-2]
After starting the variable display of the symbols, it is provided with a symbol display means capable of performing the variable symbol display to be stopped,
The combination effect may be performed during one time of the symbol variation display,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1, characterized by:
[Aspect C3-3]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect of performing a second timer display,
The combination effect is a effect that may include a fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed, and when the player operates the operation unit, the fourth display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2, characterized by:
[Aspect C3-4]
In the combination effect, the first timer display in the second display effect may be displayed in the area where the first operation unit image is displayed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-3, characterized by:
[Aspect C3-5]
The first timer display in the second display effect is one mode of timer display among a plurality of modes of timer display including a first mode of timer display and a second mode of timer display. done,
In the second display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the first mode, it functions as a first chance up display,
In the second display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the second aspect, it functions as a second chance-up display with a higher chance of a big win than the first chance-up display,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4, characterized by:
[Aspect C3-6]
The timer display of the first aspect of the first timer display has an initial timer value of a first length,
wherein the timer display of the second aspect of the first timer display has an initial timer value of a second length that is longer than the first length;
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-5, characterized by:

The timer pseudo continuous effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG. This timer pseudo-continuous effect can be executed during the variation performance of the decorative symbols (during one variation performance), for example, at the start of the variation of the decorative symbols, during the ready-to-win performance, and the like.

[Timer Simulated Continuous Effect A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the timer pseudo continuous effect A. FIG.
In the timer pseudo continuous effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 81(A), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a timer image C4A is displayed. The timer image C4A is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. A timer image C4A shown in FIG. 81A shows "15 seconds" as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), button pressing effect A is executed. In the button pressing effect A, a button image C4B and a timer image C4A are displayed. The button image C4B is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the valid operation period. Specifically, the button image C4B is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and an image representing a state in which the color of the button image C4D is darkened and/or a state in which the button image C4D is lit. is. Adjacent to the button image C4B, the characters "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. FIG. The timer image C4A indicates that the timer value is "0 seconds". The button image C4B is displayed after the timer value of the timer image C4A becomes "0 seconds". The display is not limited to this, and may be displayed after reaching a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before the timer value reaches “0 seconds”. It should be noted that the valid operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image C4B disappears after the effective operation period has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), a pseudo continuous effect A is executed. In the pseudo-continuation effect A, a pseudo-continuation suggestive image C4C is displayed. The pseudo-continuous suggestive image C4C is an image reminiscent of a pseudo-continuous effect, and more specifically, "pseudo × 2" indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect is the second time is shown. Further, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 patterns, and the decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the logo pattern suggesting the pseudo continuous effect. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in the manner of "7, logo symbol, 7".
After the pseudo continuous effect, a predetermined effect is executed. As the predetermined production, various productions such as reach production, super reach production, chance up production (big hit expectation indication production), jackpot announcement production, reach development destination announcement production, pending change announcement, or look-ahead start announcement are executed. obtain.
The pseudo-continuous effect is a effect that is executed at the start of the variable change or during the ready-to-win effect. An effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part, an effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping a predetermined logo, or a display reminiscent of a pseudo-continuation such as “x2”, “x3”, “pseudo”, Including the effect to execute the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

[Timer pseudo continuous effect B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the timer pseudo continuous effect B. FIG.
In the timer pseudo continuous effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 82(A), the timer button display effect A is executed. In this timer button display effect A, a timer image C4A and a button image C4D are displayed. The button image C4D is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is anticipated that the effect using the effect button 63 will be executed from now on. The timer image C4A is the same as the timer image C4A in FIG. 81A, the timer value is displayed in a countdown manner, and "15 seconds" is shown as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), button depression effect A is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 81(B).
Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), pseudo-continuous effect A is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 81(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), timer button display effect B is executed. In timer button display effect B, timer image C4A and button image C4D are displayed. The button image C4D is the same as the button image C4D in FIG. 82(A). The timer image C4A shows "30 seconds" as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(E), similarly to FIG. 82(B), button depression effect B is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 82(F), a pseudo-continuous effect B is executed. In the pseudo-continuation effect B, a pseudo-continuation suggestive image C4E is displayed. The pseudo-continuous suggestive image C4E is an image reminiscent of a pseudo-continuous effect, and more specifically, "pseudo × 3" is shown to suggest that the pseudo-continuous effect is the third time. Further, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 patterns, and the decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the logo pattern suggesting the pseudo continuous effect. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in the manner of "7, logo symbol, 7".
After the pseudo continuous effect B, a predetermined effect is executed. As the predetermined production, various productions such as reach production, super reach production, chance up production (big hit expectation indication production), jackpot announcement production, reach development destination announcement production, pending change announcement, or look-ahead start announcement are executed. obtain.

In the timer display effects in the timer pseudo continuous effects A and B, a plurality of patterns are prepared for the timer initial value of the timer image C4A. For example, as the timer initial value of timer image C4A, the first pattern is set to 15 seconds, and the second pattern is set to 30 seconds, which is longer than the first pattern, as shown in FIG. In this case, in the timer display effect, the probability of the timer pseudo-continuous effect B occurring when the second pattern is set is higher than when the first pattern is set as the timer initial value of the timer image C4A. That is, after the pseudo-continuous effect, the probability that the pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 82(F)) is performed again is high. When the timer initial value of timer image C4A is displayed in the first pattern and when displayed in the second pattern, it functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer pseudo continuous effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the timer image C4A is displayed in the timer pseudo continuous effects A and B, and the timer value of the timer image C4A becomes a predetermined value (0 seconds). In response to this, a button image C4B prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed, and a pseudo continuous effect is executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63. According to this configuration, it is possible to create a feeling of surprise rather than simply executing a pseudo-continuous effect, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, in the timer pseudo continuous effect B, a button image C4D and a timer image C4A suggesting that a button effect using the effect button 63 will be performed are displayed. In response to the timer value of the timer image C4A reaching a predetermined value (0 seconds), a button image C4B prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed, and the player presses the effect button 63. A pseudo-continuous effect is executed in accordance with. According to this configuration, by displaying the button image C4D, it is possible to anticipate the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, and to add excitement to the progress of the game. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B are executed during one variable effect. According to this configuration, since the timer value shifts from the initial value to the predetermined value (0 seconds) during one variable effect, the player can recognize the change in the button image without error from the timer display, and the effect is achieved. It is possible to prevent the user from missing the pressing timing of the button 63 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the rate of participation of the players in the game presentation, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, in the timer pseudo-continuous effect B, after the pseudo-continuous effect A is executed, the timer button display effect is executed again (see FIG. 82(D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a surprise and a sense of anticipation for the realization of the pseudo-continuous effect again, and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. .

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the timer initial value of the timer image C4A may be displayed in the first pattern or in the second pattern in the timer pseudo continuous effects A and B. functions as a chance-up production (chance-up display). According to this configuration, it is possible to create a chance-up effect with the timer initial value, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the timer initial value of the timer image C4A may be displayed in the first pattern or in the second pattern in the timer pseudo continuous effects A and B. each function as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and the probability of the timer pseudo continuous effect B occurring when the second pattern is set is higher than when the first pattern is set, that is, After the pseudo-continuous effect, the probability that the pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 82(F)) will be performed again is high. According to this configuration, the chance-up effect can be created with the timer initial value, and the player can look forward to the appearance of the second pattern as the timer initial value. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the timer pseudo-continuous effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, in the timer pseudo continuous effects A and B, the button image C4B is displayed in the button pressing effect, and the effect button 63 is pressed by the player. , and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed in response to the pressing, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the player does not press the effect button 63 in spite of the fact that the button image C4B is displayed in the button pressing effect, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B are executed during one variable effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. , B may be executed over a plurality of variable effects.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the timer image C4A is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image C4A may be displayed in a count-up manner in which the timer value is counted up. In this case, when a predetermined value is reached, the timeout display effect described above can be executed.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer initial value of the timer image C4A may be displayed in the first pattern or in the second pattern in the timer pseudo continuous effects A and B. each function as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and the probability of the timer pseudo continuous effect B occurring when the second pattern is set is higher than when the first pattern is set, that is, After the pseudo-continuous effect, the probability that the pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 82(F)) is performed again is high, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B, when the timer initial value of timer image C4A is displayed, the timer image may be displayed in a first color (for example, blue) or in a second color (for example, , Gold), each of which functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display). , timer pseudo-continuous effect B, that is, the probability that the pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 82(F)) is performed again after the pseudo-continuous effect is high.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer pseudo continuous effects A and B shown in FIGS. The above timer images may be displayed at the same time.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C4-1]
effect display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects;
an operation unit operable by a player;
A gaming machine comprising
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of performing a first timer display,
the second display effect is an effect of displaying a first operation portion image representing the operation portion and prompting the player to operate the operation portion;
the third display effect is a pseudo continuous effect;
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the timer value of the first timer display in the first display effect reaches a predetermined value, the second display effect is performed. , the third display effect may be performed in response to the operation of the operation unit by the player;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C4-2]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect of displaying a second operation unit image representing the operation unit,
The combination effect is a effect that may include a fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display may be performed when the first display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1, characterized by:
[Aspect C4-3]
After starting the variable display of the symbols, it is provided with a symbol display means capable of performing the variable symbol display to be stopped,
The combination effect may be performed during one time of the symbol variation display,
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1 or aspect C4-2, characterized by:
[Aspect C4-4]
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is a effect for performing a second timer display,
The combined effect is a effect that may include a fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect may be performed after the third display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-3, characterized by:
[Aspect C4-5]
The first timer display in the first display effect is one mode of timer display among a plurality of modes of timer display including a first mode of timer display and a second mode of timer display. done,
In the first display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the first mode, it functions as a first chance up display,
In the first display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the second mode, the fifth display effect is performed after the third display effect is performed in the combination effect. function as a second chance-up display with a higher expectation than the first chance-up display,
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-4, characterized by:
[Aspect C4-6]
The timer display of the first aspect of the first timer display has an initial timer value of a first length,
The timer display of the second aspect of the timer display has an initial timer value of a second length that is longer than the first length.
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-5, characterized by:

The pending change effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. FIG. This pending change effect is performed in parallel with the variable effect of the decorative pattern. Of course, this includes the execution of a reach effect (super reach effect).

[Holding change effect A]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the pending change effect A. FIG. The pending change effect A is executed as one of the look-ahead effects. That is, it is executed as one aspect of the prefetch effect patterns A and B described above. The pending change effect A has two aspects based on the look-ahead effect pattern.

First, in the pending change effect A, as shown in FIG. 83(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start production, the decoration pattern during fluctuation is displayed on the upper left. In addition, a pending image 9A and a pending digested image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen.

As one aspect following the variable start effect, as shown in FIG. 83(B), change display effect (1) is executed. In the change display effect (1), an elliptical change image CG1 labeled "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG1 is blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(C), change movement effect (1) is executed. In the change movement effect (1), an effect is performed in which the change image CG1 is sucked into the pending image HGW, which is one of the pending images 9A. The held image HGW is displayed in white. This suspension image HGW corresponds to the target suspension of the look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), a pending change effect (1) is performed. In the pending change effect (1), the white pending image HGW changes to the blue pending image HGB similar to the change image CG1.

On the other hand, as another mode following the variable start effect, as shown in FIG. 83(E), change display effect (2) is executed. In the change display effect (2), an elliptical change image CG2 labeled "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG2 is red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(F), change movement effect (2) is executed. In the change movement effect (2), an effect is performed in which the change image CG2 is sucked into the pending image HGW, which is one of the pending images 9A. The held image HGW is displayed in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(G), a pending change effect (2) is performed. In the pending change effect (2), the white pending image HGW changes to the red pending image HGR similar to the change image CG2.

[Holding change effect B]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining pending change effect B. FIG. The pending change effect B is executed as one of the look-ahead effects. That is, it is executed as one aspect of the prefetch effect patterns A and B described above.

First, in the pending change effect B, as shown in FIG. 84(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start production, the decoration pattern during fluctuation is displayed on the upper left. In addition, a pending image 9A and a pending digested image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(B), change display effect (1) is executed. In the change display effect (1), an elliptical change image CG1 labeled "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG1 is blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(C), change movement effect (1) is executed. In the change movement effect (1), an effect is performed in which the change image CG1 is sucked into the pending image HGW, which is one of the pending images 9A. The held image HGW is displayed in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(D), a pending change effect (1) is performed. In the pending change effect (1), the white pending image HGW changes to the blue pending image HGB similar to the change image CG1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(E), a change display effect (1) is executed in which a change image CG1 is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 84(B).
Next, as shown in FIG. 84(F), the change movement effect (1) is executed in the same manner as in FIG. is done.
Next, as shown in FIG. 84(G), a pending change effect (2) is performed. In the hold change effect (2), the blue hold image HGB is further changed to a red hold image HGR.

[Holding change effect C]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the pending change effect C. FIG. The pending change effect C is executed as one of the look-ahead effects. That is, it is executed as one aspect of the prefetch effect patterns A and B described above.

First, in the pending change effect C, as shown in FIG. 85(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start production, the decoration pattern during fluctuation is displayed on the upper left. In addition, a pending image 9A and a pending digested image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a button pressing promotion effect is executed. In the button pressing promotion effect, a button image BB representing the effect button 63 is displayed on the right side of the screen, and a text image TG reading "Continuous hits!" is displayed together with the button image BB. As a result, the player is urged to hit the performance button 63 repeatedly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(C), change display effect (1) is executed. In the change display effect (1), an elliptical change image CG1 labeled "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG1 is blue. At this time, a button pressing promotion effect is also performed in parallel.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(D), change display effect (2) is executed. In the change display effect (2), an elliptical change image CG2 labeled "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG2 is red. At this time, a button pressing promotion effect is also performed in parallel.

That is, when the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63 by executing the button pressing promotion effect, the blue change image CG1 is displayed first, and then the red change image CG2 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(E), change movement effect (2) is executed. In the change movement effect (2), an effect is performed in which the change image CG2 is sucked into the pending image HGW, which is one of the pending images 9A. The held image HGW is displayed in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(F), a pending change effect (2) is performed. In the pending change effect (2), the white pending image HGW changes to the red pending image HGR similar to the change image CG2.

[Effect example]
Examples of the effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, an elliptical change image labeled "Change" is displayed as a change display effect. The pending image HGW is changed in correspondence with this change image. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect a change in the pending image by the change image, and to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 83(B), the white pending image HGW is displayed as shown in FIGS. 83(C) and 83(D). is changed to the blue held image HGB. Further, when the red change image CG2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 83(E), the white pending image HGW changes to the red pending image HGR as shown in FIGS. 83(F) and 83(G). be changed. According to this configuration, the displayed change images CG1 and CG2 can be expected to change to the hold images HGB and HGR, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 84(B), the white pending image HGW is displayed as shown in FIGS. 84(C) and 84(D). is changed to the blue held image HGB. Further, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed again as shown in FIG. 84(E), the blue pending image HGB changes to the red pending image HGR as shown in FIGS. 84(F) and 84(G). can be changed to According to this configuration, by displaying the change image CG1 again, it is possible to expect a change to the hold image HGR, thereby improving interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83(C), (F), FIGS. 84(C), (F), and FIG. 85(E), a change movement effect is performed. In the change-moving effect, the change-moving effect is performed such that the change image is sucked into one of the pending images 9A, and the pending image is changed. According to this configuration, it is possible to produce a change in the pending image, and to improve interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a button depression promotion effect is executed to prompt the player to hit the effect button 63 repeatedly. When the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 85(C) and 85(D). According to this configuration, since the change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed by operating the effect button 63, it is possible to improve interest.

[Modification]
Modifications of the present embodiment are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, an elliptical change image labeled "Change" is displayed as a change display effect. The pending image HGW is changed in correspondence with this change image. Here, the blue change image CG1 and the red change image CG2 are taken as examples, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there may be three or more types of change images.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 83(B), it changes to a blue pending image HGB, and as shown in FIG. When CG2 is displayed, it changes to red pending image HGR. In other words, the change image and the pending image after the change correspond one-to-one. On the other hand, two or more types of change images may correspond to one pending image, and one change image may correspond to two or more types of pending images.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a button depression promotion effect is executed to prompt the player to hit the effect button 63 repeatedly. When the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 85(C) and 85(D). On the other hand, even if the effect button 63 is not operated, the change display effects shown in FIGS. 85(C) and 85(D) may be performed.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a button depression promotion effect is executed to prompt the player to hit the effect button 63 repeatedly. When the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 85(C) and 85(D). On the other hand, if the production button 63 is not operated, the change display production shown in FIGS. You may make it perform the holding change production as shown.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a button depression promotion effect is executed to prompt the player to hit the effect button 63 repeatedly. When the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 85(C) and 85(D). As another mode for this, when the effect button 63 is hit repeatedly, the effect may be such that the change display effect (2) as shown in FIG. 85(D) is not performed. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 83(C) and 83(D), it is conceivable to execute change movement effect (1) and hold change effect (1).

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C5-1]
display means capable of informing the number of pending by the number of displayed pending images;
A gaming machine comprising a production means capable of executing a plurality of productions,
The effect means is capable of displaying a plurality of change notice images for notifying a change in the pending image,
A gaming machine, wherein the holding image is changed in correspondence with the plurality of change notice images.

[Aspect C5-2]
For one of the reserved images, when the first change notice image is displayed, the reserved image is changed to the first reserved image, and when the second change notice image is displayed, the reserved image is changed. A gaming machine characterized by changing to a second reserved image.

[Aspect C5-3]
When a first change notice image is displayed for one of the hold images, the hold image is changed to the first hold image, and when the first change notice image is displayed again, the hold image is changed. A game machine characterized by changing an image to a second reserved image.

[Aspect C5-4]
A gaming machine, wherein the displayed change notice image acts on one of the reserved images, and then changes the reserved image.

[Aspect C5-5]
An operation means that can be operated by the player is further provided,
A game machine, wherein the plurality of change notice images are displayed after the operation means is operated.

The winning ball number display effect will be described with reference to FIG. This number-of-acquired-balls display effect can be executed during a special game such as a jackpot game. That is, it can be displayed as one of the round game effects executed by the image control microcomputer 101 upon receiving a round designation command from the sub-control board 90 .

[Acquisition ball number display effect]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the winning ball number display effect. In the winning ball number display effect, first, the winning image display of FIG. 86(A) is executed. This winning image display is, for example, the second ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 in the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 in which the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is "long open" (FIG. 14(B)). It is executed when at least a portion of subsequent game balls pass through the V area 39 . Here, a V winning image WP indicating that the game ball has passed through the V area 39 is displayed. Since the V winning image WP is an image suggesting that the high-probability time-saving state will be reached later, it can be said that the image suggests that the player will be in an advantageous gaming state later. Note that in FIG. 86A, the character image CRA1 is displayed while the V prize image WP is being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(B), the display CGN of the number of pitches that can be obtained this time is displayed. The number of balls that can be acquired this time is a measure of the number of balls that can be acquired in one round game. Here, at the start of the round next to the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71, the number of obtainable balls display CGN this time is displayed as a measure of the number of obtainable balls in the round game. In FIG. 86(B), a plurality of right-handed shot images RD1 and RD2 and a character image CRA1 are displayed in a state where the number of balls that can be acquired this time display CGN is displayed. The right-handed images RD1 and RD2 are images suggesting that the game ball is shot to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(C), the currently acquired ball number display AAN is displayed. The number of currently obtained balls is the number of balls already obtained in the winning game. Here, at the start of the round, the number of balls acquired from the first round of the jackpot game to before the start of the round game is displayed as the number of currently acquired balls display AAN. Note that in FIG. 86(C), a plurality of right-handed shot images RD1 and RD2 and a character image CRA1 are displayed in a state in which the currently acquired ball number display AAN is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(D), the currently acquired ball number display AAN and the planned cumulative acquired ball number display TPN are displayed. The planned cumulative acquired number of balls is the number of balls scheduled to be acquired at the end of this round. Here, during the round game from the start of the round, the planned accumulated acquired ball number display TPN is displayed adjacent to the currently acquired ball number display AAN. In FIG. 86(D), the planned cumulative number of acquired balls display TPN and the currently acquired number of balls display AAN are displayed vertically adjacent to each other, and a plurality of character images CRA1 and CRA2 are also displayed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the acquired ball number display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86(C), the number of currently obtained balls AAN is displayed in a state in which a plurality of right-handed hitting images RD1 and RD2 are displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of exhilaration by knowing the number of balls already obtained in the jackpot game and a sense of anticipation for further acquisition by the right-handed display, thereby improving interest. can be planned.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86(D), during the round game, the expected cumulative acquired ball number display TPN is displayed adjacent to the current acquired ball number AAN. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an exhilarating feeling that the number of currently acquired balls approaches the planned cumulative number of acquired balls, thereby improving interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86(B), the number of balls display CGN that can be obtained this time is displayed at the start of the round game. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration by knowing the number of balls that can be obtained in the current round, and improve interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the V winning image WP shown in FIG. 86(A) is displayed before the currently obtainable pitch number display CGN shown in FIG. 86(B) is displayed. According to this configuration, by suggesting that the player will be in an advantageous state, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and improve interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86B, a plurality of right-handed images RD1 and RD2 are displayed together with the display CGN of the number of balls that can be obtained this time. According to this configuration, it is possible to give both a feeling of exhilaration by knowing the number of balls that can be obtained in this round and a feeling of anticipation that it will be realized by right-handed hitting by the right-handed display, thereby improving interest. be able to.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the winning ball number display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86(A), an effect is shown in which the V winning image is exemplified as an image suggesting that the game state will be advantageous to the player later. However, instead of the V winning image, the gaming machine 1 may perform a similar effect using an image other than the V winning image that suggests that the game state will be advantageous to the player later. The image other than the V winning image that suggests that the game state will be advantageous to the player later is, for example, an image that suggests the start of a big win game, an image that suggests the start of a small win game, or the like. is.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86B and 86C, two right shot images are displayed. However, the gaming machine 1 may display three or more right-handed images. Also, the gaming machine 1 may display a plurality of right-handed images having different sizes. In addition, the gaming machine 1 may display a plurality of right hitting images RD1 and RD2 in FIG. 86(D).

[Modification 3]
The acquired ball number display effect may be executed in a special game other than the jackpot game. For example, it may be executed during a small winning game.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image suggesting that a game ball is shot in a predetermined direction;
In a state in which a plurality of the first images are displayed during a winning game, a first effect can be executed in which the number of balls currently acquired representing the number of balls already acquired in the winning game is displayed. Amusement machine.
[Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
During the round game, it is possible to execute a second effect of displaying, adjacent to the display of the currently acquired number of balls, a scheduled cumulative number of acquired balls representing the number of balls scheduled to be acquired at the end of the current round. game machine.
[Aspect D1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-1 or aspect D1-2,
A game machine capable of executing a third performance of displaying the number of balls obtainable this time representing the number of balls obtainable in the current round at the start of a round game.
[Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3,
one of the plurality of types of images is a second image suggesting that the player will be in an advantageous gaming state later;
The game machine is capable of executing a fourth effect in which the second image is displayed on the display means before the third effect is executed.
[Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3 or aspect D1-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the third effect, the first image is displayed together with the display of the number of balls obtainable this time.

The payout display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. This payout display effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols in the variable probability state or the time saving state (for example, the final stage of the ready-to-win effect (before the start of the jackpot game)), or during the jackpot game.

[Payment display effect A]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the payout display effect A. FIG.
In the payout display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 87(A), a payout schedule display effect is executed. This payout schedule display effect is executed after the jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as the jackpot) is announced, before the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as the jackpot game), or during the jackpot game, and the payout is performed. A projected ball number suggesting image D2A is displayed. The scheduled payout number of balls indication image D2A is an image suggesting the number of balls scheduled to be paid out in the jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as the scheduled payout number of balls). The scheduled payout number suggestion image D2A in FIG. 87A shows that 800 balls are scheduled to be paid out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(B), a cumulative payout schedule display effect is executed. This cumulative payout schedule display effect is executed before the start of the jackpot game or during the jackpot game, and the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2B is displayed. The image D2B indicating the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is a jackpot that was won prior to the jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as a past jackpot during consecutive wins) among consecutive jackpots during the time saving state (hereinafter also referred to as consecutive jackpots). is an image suggesting the number of balls (hereinafter also referred to as the cumulative scheduled payout number of balls) obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls paid out during the jackpot game. In other words, the cumulative payout ball number suggesting image D2B suggests the number of balls to be paid out in a jackpot game based on a jackpot during consecutive games.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(C), the cumulative payout additional display effect is executed. In this cumulative payout additional display effect, a cumulative payout ball number suggesting image D2B and a cumulative payout ball number suggesting image D2C are displayed. The cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2C is the number of balls paid out during the jackpot game based on the past jackpots during the consecutive wins plus the number of balls paid out, which is the number of balls already paid out during the jackpot game. It is an image suggesting the number (hereinafter also referred to as the cumulative number of paid-out balls). In other words, the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2C suggests the number of balls that have already been paid out in the jackpot game based on the jackpot during consecutive wins. In FIG. 87(C), the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2B is arranged below the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2C, and between the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2B and the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2C. is indicated by a slash (line). That is, the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2B is placed at the denominator position, and the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2C is placed at the numerator position, and is represented in the form of "accumulated payout ball number/accumulated payout ball number". .

This payout display effect A is executed in the case of a big win that shifts to the variable probability state with time reduction, and is not executed in the case of a big win that shifts to the non-variable probability state with time reduction. In addition, not limited to this, the payout display effect A may be executed even at the time of the big win, which does not shift to the non-probability variable state with time reduction.

[Payment display effect B]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining a payout display effect B. FIG.
In the payout display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 88(A), the payout schedule display effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(B), a cumulative payout schedule display effect is executed. This cumulative payout schedule display effect is executed before the start of the jackpot game or during the jackpot game, and includes the cumulative payout ball number suggesting image D2B, the jackpot payout ball number related image D2E, and the number of consecutive wins suggested. Image D2D is displayed. The payout ball number related image D2E indicates the number of balls already paid out in the jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as the payout ball number) and the scheduled payout ball number. In FIG. 88(B), the display of the number of balls to be paid out is arranged to the right of the display of the number of balls to be paid out, and a slash ( line) are shown. That is, the display of the number of balls to be paid out is placed in the denominator position, and the display of the number of balls to be paid out is placed in the position of the denominator. The image D2D indicating the number of times of consecutive games is an image indicating the number of times of winning consecutive games, that is, the number of times of winning consecutive games.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(C), cumulative payout additional display effect is executed. This cumulative payout additional display effect is executed during the jackpot game, and a payout ball number related image D2E, a consecutive winning number suggestion image D2D, and a cumulative payout ball number related image D2F are displayed. The cumulative payout ball number related image D2F suggests the cumulative payout ball number and the cumulative payout ball number. In FIG. 88(C), the display of the cumulative payout ball number is arranged on the right side of the display of the cumulative payout ball number, and a slash ( line) are shown. That is, the display of the cumulative number of payout balls is placed in the denominator position, and the display of the cumulative number of payout balls is placed in the denominator position.

In the payout display effects A and B, as described above, the payout schedule display effect is executed at the end of the variable effect (reach effect) (before the start of the jackpot game) or during the jackpot game, and the cumulative payout schedule display effect is executed. is executed at the end of the variable performance (reach performance) (before the start of the jackpot game) or during the jackpot game, and the cumulative payout additional display performance can be executed during the jackpot game. Therefore, for example, in the payout display effects A and B, the payout schedule display effect is executed before the start of the jackpot game, and the cumulative payout schedule display effect and the cumulative payout additional display effect are executed during the jackpot game.

This payout display effect B is executed in the case of a big win that shifts to the variable probability state with time reduction, and is not executed in the case of a big win that shifts to the non-variable probability state with time reduction. In addition, not limited to this, the payout display effect B may be executed even at the time of the big win without shifting to the non-probability variable state with time reduction.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the payout display effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, in the payout display effects A and B, the scheduled payout display effect displays the image D2A indicating the number of balls to be paid out, and the cumulative payout display effect. , the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2B is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can grasp the cumulative number of balls to be paid out during the consecutive wins in addition to the number of balls to be paid out in the jackpot game, so that the player's willingness to play can be improved. . As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. The number of payout balls is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play until the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is reached. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, when the cumulative payout ball number is displayed in the payout display effect B in the cumulative payout display effect or the cumulative payout additional display effect, The number of payout balls is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can recognize the number of balls to be paid out, and can increase the player's desire to play until the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is reached. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, in the payout display effect C, when the cumulative number of expected payout balls is displayed, the number of consecutive wins is suggested. According to this configuration, the average number of balls to be paid out (average number of balls to be paid out) in one jackpot game can be associated from the relationship between the cumulative number of balls to be paid out and the number of consecutive wins. , the player can feel a sense of happiness, and when the average number of paid-out balls is small, the player's willingness to play can be improved in order to extend the consecutive chances. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the payout display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, in the payout display effects A and B, the cumulative payout additional display effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. There may be a case where the cumulative payout additional display effect is not executed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, in the payout display effects A and B, the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is displayed, but the present invention is limited to this. isn't it. For example, when the gaming state after the big win is not the variable probability gaming state, the display showing the cumulative number of balls to be paid out may not be executed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the payout display effects A and B are executed in the order of the payout schedule display effect, the cumulative payout schedule display effect, and the cumulative payout additional display effect. , the present invention is not limited to this, and the order of these may be changed. For example, the order of the payout schedule display effect, the cumulative payout additional display effect, and the cumulative payout schedule display effect may be used, or the order of the cumulative payout schedule display effect, the payout schedule display effect, and the cumulative payout additional display effect may be used.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, in the payout display performances A and B, the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is determined based on the jackpot during the consecutive games. is not limited to this. For example, the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is the number of balls paid out during the jackpot game based on the jackpots won prior to the jackpot (cumulative number of balls paid out on the day) among the consecutive jackpots from the morning of the day. The number of balls (accumulated number of balls scheduled to be paid out on the day) may be added to the number of balls scheduled to be paid out. In this case, the cumulative number of balls paid out on the day may also be displayed.
In addition, the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is the number of balls paid out during the jackpot game based on the jackpots that were won before the jackpot (cumulative number of balls to be paid out at a predetermined timing) among the jackpots that were consecutive from a certain timing. The number of balls to be paid out may be added (accumulated number of balls to be paid out at a predetermined timing). In this case, the cumulative payout ball number at a predetermined timing may also be displayed. The gaming machine 1 may have a function that allows the player to determine "certain timing". This allows the player to arbitrarily set "certain timing".

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect D2-1]
effect display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects;
Determination means for determining whether or not it is a big hit by lottery;
a jackpot game executing means capable of executing a jackpot game for paying out game media to a player in the case of a jackpot;
A gaming machine comprising
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect for performing a scheduled payout display representing a scheduled payout number, which is the number of game media scheduled to be paid out in the first jackpot game based on the first jackpot,
The first jackpot is a jackpot in a second game state that is more advantageous for the player than in the first game state,
The second display effect is performed during the first jackpot game, and the number of game media paid out during the second jackpot game based on the second jackpot is equal to the number of game media in the first jackpot game. It is an effect that displays the cumulative payout schedule showing the cumulative payout quantity added with the payout plan quantity,
The second jackpot is a jackpot that is won before the first jackpot among consecutive jackpots including the first jackpot during the second gaming state,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D2-2]
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is performed during the first jackpot game, and the game already paid out during the first jackpot game is equal to the number of game media paid out during the second jackpot game. It is an effect that displays the cumulative payout number that shows the cumulative payout number including the number of media,
The combined effect is a effect that may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect may be performed while the second display effect is being performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1, characterized by:
[Aspect D2-3]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is performed during the first jackpot game, and is a jackpot payout display representing the number of game media already paid out during the first jackpot game,
The combination effect is a effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect may be performed while the second display effect is being performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1 or aspect D2-2, characterized by:
[Aspect D2-4]
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is performed during the first big win game, and is a performance of displaying the number of continuous big wins representing the number of times of the continuous big wins,
The combination effect is a effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed while the second display effect is being performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-3, characterized by:
[Aspect D2-5]
When the first jackpot is a jackpot in which the game state after the first jackpot game is a third game state more disadvantageous than the second game state, the combination effect is not executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4, characterized by:

The winning image/character image superimposition effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91. FIG. This winning image/character image superimposition effect can be executed during a special game such as a jackpot game. That is, it can be displayed as one of the round game effects executed by the image control microcomputer 101 upon receiving a round designation command from the sub-control board 90 .

[Prize-winning image/character image superimposed effect A]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the winning image/character image superimposition effect A. FIG. In the winning image/character image superimposition effect A, first, the winning image display of FIG. 89(A) is executed. This winning image display is, for example, the second ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 in the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 in which the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is "long open" (FIG. 14(B)). It is executed when at least a portion of subsequent game balls pass through the V area 39 . Here, a V winning image WP indicating that the game ball has passed through the V area 39 is displayed. Since the V winning image WP is an image suggesting that the high-probability time-saving state will be reached later, it can be said that the image suggests that the player will be in an advantageous gaming state later. In FIG. 89A, a character image AN1 and a right-handed shot image RD1 are displayed while the V winning image WP is being displayed. The first character image AN1 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a and moves leftward. The right-handed image RD1 is displayed so as to partially overlap the V winning image WP. As described above, in this specification, "images overlap" means that they appear to be overlapped from the player's point of view, and whether or not they actually overlap is irrelevant. For example, when at least part of the V winning image WP displayed on the display screen 7a appears to be missing due to the first character image AN1, it can be said that the images overlap.

The first character image AN1 moves to the position of the V winning image WP, and the winning image/character image superimposed display shown in FIG. 89B is executed. Specifically, an image in which the first character image AN1 is superimposed on a portion of the V winning image WP is displayed. In other words, an image showing a state in which the first character image AN1 is positioned in front of part of the V winning image WP is displayed. Even when the first character image AN1 is superimposed, part of the V winning image WP is displayed without being hidden. In FIG. 89(B), a second character image AN2 and a right shot image RD1 are also displayed. The second character image AN2 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a and moves leftward following the first character image AN1.

By moving both the first character image AN1 and the second character image AN2 to the left, the winning image/character image superimposed display shown in FIG. 89(C) is executed. Specifically, an image in which both the first character image AN1 and the second character image AN2 are superimposed on a portion of the V winning image WP is displayed. In FIG. 89(C), a right hitting image RD1 is further displayed.

By further moving the first character image AN1 and the second character image AN2 to the left, the winning image/character image superimposed display shown in FIG. 89(D) is executed. Specifically, an image in which only the second character image AN2 is superimposed on a portion of the V winning image WP is displayed. In other words, the V winning image WP is displayed without overlapping the first character image AN1. The first character image AN1 is framed out from the left end of the display screen 7a.

After that, the second character image AN2 moves further to the left, so that the winning image and the character image are not superimposed as shown in FIG. 89(E). Specifically, the V winning image WP in which the character images (the first character image AN1 and the second character image AN2) are not overlapped is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 89(F), the second character image AN2 is framed out from the left end of the display screen 7a.

[Prize-winning image/character image superimposed effect B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the winning image/character image superimposition effect B. FIG.
The winning image/character image superimposed effect B differs from the superimposed effect A in FIG. 89 in that the shape of the V winning image WP changes. The shape of the V winning image WP of the superimposed effect B changes so as to represent a state in which the figure representing the three-dimensional shape of the Roman letter "V" is horizontally rotated. First, in FIG. 90(A), a character image AN1 and a right-handed shot image RD1 are displayed while the V winning image WP is being displayed. The first character image AN1 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a and moves leftward. The right shot image RD1 is displayed so as to partially overlap the V winning image WP.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(B), the shape of the V prize image WP changes compared to FIG. 90(A), and the first character image AN1 overlaps a part of the V prize image WP. image is displayed. The V winning image WP has a shape showing a state in which the figure representing the three-dimensional shape is oriented more laterally than in FIG. 90(A). Even when the first character image AN1 is superimposed, a part of the V prize image WP is displayed. In FIG. 90B, a second character image AN2 and a right-handed shot image RD1 are also displayed. The second character image AN2 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a and moves leftward following the first character image AN1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), while the shape of the V prize image WP changes as compared to FIG. An image in which both of the images AN2 are superimposed is displayed. In FIG. 90(C), a right hitting image RD1 is further displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(D), while the shape of the V prize image WP changes compared to FIG. 90(C), only the second character image AN2 overlaps a part of the V prize image WP. A status image is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 90(E), the V winning image WP is displayed in a state where the shape of the V winning image WP is changed as compared with that in FIG. 90(D) and the character image is not superimposed. After that, in FIG. 90(F), the V winning image WP is displayed in a state where the character image is not superimposed while the shape of the V winning image WP changes compared to that in FIG. 90(E).

[Prize-winning image/character image superimposed effect C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the winning image/character image superimposition effect C. As shown in FIG.
The winning image/character image superimposed effect C differs from the superimposed effect B in FIG. 90 in the display method of the character image AN1. The character image AN1 of the superimposed effect C does not move left and right on the display screen 7a to intersect with the V winning image WP, but changes in shape according to the change in shape of the V winning image WP. Specifically, the character image AN1 of the superimposed effect C is arranged on one side of the three-dimensional shape of the V winning image WP, and rotates horizontally when the three-dimensional shape of the V winning image WP rotates horizontally. The shape changes to represent such a state. First, as shown in FIG. 91A, an image in which the character image AN1 is superimposed on the V winning image WP is displayed. Specifically, an image showing a state in which the character image AN1 is positioned in part of the front of the V prize image WP is displayed. Even when the first character image AN1 is superimposed, a part of the V prize image WP is displayed. The right-handed image RD1 is displayed so as to partially overlap the V winning image WP.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), the shapes of the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 change from those in FIG. 91(A). Specifically, an image is displayed showing a state in which the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 is oriented more laterally than in FIG. 91(A). Even in this state, the image is such that the character image AN1 overlaps a part of the V winning image WP.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), an image is displayed showing a state in which the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 is oriented more laterally than in FIG. 91(B). Here, the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 is oriented horizontally, and the V winning image WP is displayed without overlapping the character image AN1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(D), the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 rotates more laterally than in FIG. An image is displayed in which the other side on which the character image AN1 is not arranged can be seen. The character image AN1 is hidden by the V winning image WP, and the V winning image WP is displayed without overlapping the character image AN1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(E), the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 rotates more horizontally than in FIG. An image is displayed in which the other side on which the character image AN1 is not arranged is the front side. The character image AN1 is partially visible between the V prize images WP, but the V prize image WP is displayed without overlapping the character image AN1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91(F), the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 rotates more laterally than in FIG. The V winning image WP is displayed in a state where it cannot be seen and the character image AN1 is not superimposed thereon.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the winning image/character image superimposed effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89(B) to (D), FIGS. 90(B) to (D), and FIGS. An image with the character image superimposed on is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 89(A), (E), (F), FIGS. 90(A), (E), (F), and FIGS. 91(C) to (F), the V prize in which the character images are not overlapped An image WP is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the display of the V winning image WP, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89(B) to (D), FIGS. 90(B) to (D), and FIGS. 91(A) and (B), a part of the V winning image WP Even when the image with the character image superimposed thereon is displayed, another part of the V prize image WP is displayed. According to this configuration, even if the character image overlaps a part of the V prize image WP, the player can see a part of the V prize image WP, so that the player can be notified that the V prize has been won. It can be convinced, and the improvement of interest can be aimed at.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89, 90 (A) (B) (D) to (F) and FIGS. An image in which the right-hand shot image is superimposed on a part of the image WP is displayed. According to this configuration, since the V winning image WP appears to be positioned behind the right-handed image, it is possible to produce a sense of depth in the display, thereby improving interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the V winning image WP changes its shape so as to represent a state in which the three-dimensional figure of the Roman letter "V" is rotating. According to this configuration, the V winning image WP appears to be positioned behind the right-handed image, so that the display can have a sense of depth, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, an effect is executed in which the character image overlaps with the V winning image WP, and in which the character image does not overlap. According to this configuration, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the display of the V winning image WP, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

[Modification]
A modification of the winning image/character image superimposition effect will be described below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, a portion of the V winning image WP is visible even when the V winning image WP is covered with the character image. However, the entirety of the V winning image WP may be covered with the character image, making the V winning image WP invisible.

[Modification 2]
The display contents of the winning image/character image superimposed effects A to C shown in FIGS. 89 to 91 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. Also, the winning image/character image superimposed effects A to C may not include some of the effects shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, or may include other effects. In addition, the prize winning image/character image superimposition effects A to C are not limited to those shown in FIGS. .

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect D3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image suggesting that the player will be in an advantageous gaming state later;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second image;
a first display in which an image in which the second image overlaps at least part of the first image, and a first display in which the second image does not overlap are displayed. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing:
[Aspect D3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1,
A gaming machine, wherein in the first display, a portion of the first image is displayed without overlapping the second image.
[Aspect D3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D3-1 or aspect D3-2,
one of the plurality of types of images is a third image suggesting hitting to the right;
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first display, an image in which the third image is partially superimposed on the first image is displayed.
[Aspect D3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-3,
A gaming machine, wherein the first image changes in shape to represent a state in which a three-dimensional figure is rotating.
[Aspect D3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-3 or aspect D3-4,
A gaming machine, wherein the first image is a V winning image.

92 and 93, the button image meter effect will be described. This meter effect in the button image is executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern (during one variable effect) (for example, when the decorative pattern starts to change, during the reach effect (super reach effect)), or during the jackpot game. can be

[Meter effect in button image A]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the intra-button-image meter effect A. FIG.
In the button image meter effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 92(A), a button meter display effect is executed. In this button meter display effect, a button image E1A and a meter image E1B are displayed. The button image E1A is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is anticipated that the effect using the effect button 63 will be executed from now on. The meter image E1B is a meter with a moving meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the figure), and the movement of the meter area represents the meter value. Further, the meter image E1B is horizontally arranged within the button image E1A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(B), a point giving effect is executed. In this point giving effect, a button image E1A, a meter image E1B and a point acquisition image E1C are displayed. This point giving effect can be executed multiple times. The point acquisition image E1C is an image suggesting that predetermined points have been awarded, in other words, the player has acquired predetermined points. The point acquisition image E1C in FIG. 92(B) shows that 3 points (3P) have been awarded to the player (the player has acquired 3 points). Further, in the meter image E1B arranged in the button image E1A, it is shown that the meter area has been enlarged by the points and the meter value has increased due to the points being given. The meter value of the meter image E1B increases each time the point giving effect is executed. That is, the meter value of the meter image E1B represents the cumulative value of the acquired points. This point-giving production is a reach production, a super reach production, a chance-up production (jackpot expectation level suggestion production), a jackpot announcement production, a reach development destination announcement production, a pending change announcement, a look-ahead production, a pending expectation level suggestion production, or pseudo It can be started according to execution of various effects such as continuous effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(C), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, a button image E1A, a meter image E1B, and a chance-up image E1D are displayed. The meter image E1B arranged in the button image E1A shows that the meter area is enlarged and the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX). The chance-up image E1D is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX).The chance-up image E1D in FIG. !” and the characters “Expectation 50%,” which suggests that the expected degree of jackpot is about 50%. displayed next to each other.

[Meter effect B in the button image]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the intra-button-image meter effect B. FIG.
In the in-button-image meter effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 93A, similarly to FIG. 92A, a button meter display effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 93(B), a point giving effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 92(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(C), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a button image E1A, a meter image E1B and a timer image E1E are displayed. The meter image E1B arranged in the button image E1A shows that the meter area has been enlarged and the meter value has reached the maximum (MAX). The timer image E1E is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX). In the timer image E1E, the timer value is displayed in a countdown method, and 50 seconds is set as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(D), a button pressing effect is executed. In this button pressing effect, a button image E1F and a timer image E1E are displayed. The button image E1F is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the valid operation period. Specifically, the button image E1F is displayed in the same size as the button image E1A at the position where the button image E1A was, and "PUSH" is displayed in the image, the button image E1A is darkened, and/or This image represents a state as if the button image E1A is lit. Adjacent to the button image E1F, the characters "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. The timer image E1E shows that the timer value has become "0 seconds". The button image E1F is displayed after the timer value of the timer image E1E becomes "0 seconds". The display is not limited to this, and may be displayed after reaching a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before the timer value reaches “0 seconds”. It should be noted that the valid operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E1F disappears after the valid operation period has passed. Note that the meter image E1B may be displayed within the button image E1F. In this case, the meter value of the meter image E1B may show the maximum (MAX), or may return to the initial value (no meter area).

After the button pressing effect, when the player presses the effect button 63 within the effective operation period due to the button pressing effect, a predetermined effect is executed. As the predetermined production, various productions such as reach production, super reach production, chance up production (big hit expectation indication production), jackpot announcement production, reach development destination announcement production, pending change announcement, or look-ahead start announcement are executed. obtain.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the meter effect in the button image is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the button image meter effects A and B, when the button image E1A is displayed, the meter image E1B is displayed. This meter image E1B is arranged in the button image E1A. Then, after the meter image E1B is displayed, when the meter value of the meter image E1B reaches the maximum (MAX), a predetermined effect (chance-up effect, etc.) is executed. According to this configuration, since the meter image E1B is arranged within the button image E1A, the player can associate the button effect using the effect button 63 with the meter display. Therefore, when a button effect is actually performed in relation to the meter display, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation for the button effect, and other effects than the button effect are performed in relation to the meter display. When done, the player can be given a sense of surprise. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the button image meter effects A and B, the point giving effect is executed when the meter image E1B is arranged within the button image E1A. In the point giving effect, when the point acquisition image E1C is displayed and the predetermined points are given, the meter area is enlarged by the points given in the meter image E1B, and the display with the increased meter value is executed. be. According to this configuration, since the meter value of the meter image arranged in the button image increases by giving the points, it is possible to emphasize the increase in the meter value due to the acquisition of the points. Further, when the meter value of the meter image arranged in the button image increases due to the point award and reaches a predetermined value (maximum value), and the button effect using the effect button 63 develops, the player wins big. can give great hope to As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the meter effects A and B within the button image, the chance up image E1D or the timer image E1E is replaced with the button image E1A on which the meter image E1B is arranged. displayed next to each other. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the development of the button performance using the performance button 63, and further, a sense of expectation for a big win when the button performance develops. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, in the button image meter effect B, the timer image E1E is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX) in the timer display effect. According to this configuration, when the timer value of the timer image E1E reaches the predetermined value, the player has a sense of anticipation for the development of the button performance using the performance button 63, and furthermore, a big win when the button performance develops. It can give you a sense of expectation. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, in the button image meter effect B, when the timer value of the timer image E1E becomes "0 seconds" by the button pressing effect, the player is given an effect A button image E1F prompting the user to press the button 63 is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of expectation for the development of the button performance using the performance button 63, and a stronger sense of expectation for a big win when the button performance develops. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are displayed when the meter value of the meter image E1B reaches the maximum (MAX). sometimes executed. According to this configuration, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are executed when the meter value of the meter image E1B is a predetermined value before the maximum (MAX), and the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are performed. It is possible to increase the expectation for the jackpot when it develops into. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the meter effect in the button image is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the meter effects A and B within the button image, the chance up image E1D or the timer image E1E is replaced with the button image E1A on which the meter image E1B is arranged. Although displayed adjacently, the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance up image E1D or the timer image E1E may be placed within the button image E1A or at a predetermined distance from the meter image E1B. It may be displayed at a remote position.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the meter effects A and B within the button image, the meter value of the meter image E1B is configured to increase as points are awarded. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, during the button meter display effect, the meter value of the meter image E1B is at a predetermined value (for example, the maximum value), and the meter area may be reduced and the meter value may drop due to the award of points in the point award effect. good. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0), the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 92(C) or the timer display effect shown in FIG. 93(C) may be executed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the meter effects A and B within the button image, the meter value of the meter image E1B is configured to increase as points are awarded. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of awarding points through a point awarding effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the meter area is expanded and the meter value is increased by executing a predetermined action. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 92(C) and the timer display effect shown in FIG. 93(C) are executed. It should be noted that "execution of a predetermined action" means, for example, execution of a pseudo-coup, change of a hold icon (display of a hold change), and execution of a predetermined chance-up effect. and successful completion of a given challenge (game).

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, the chance up effect and the timer display effect are such that the meter value of the meter image E1B reaches the maximum value (MAX). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect may be configured to be executed not when the meter value of the meter image E1B is the maximum value (MAX) but when it becomes a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value. The predetermined value may be, for example, a half value or a quarter value of the meter value. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be added to the meter area of the meter image E1B so that the player can understand the predetermined value.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, after the chance up image E1D is displayed in the chance up effect in the button image meter effect A, the meter value of the button image E1A is set to the initial value (0). may be set back to . After that, a point giving effect may be executed, and an effect of increasing the meter value may be executed.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, in the meter effect B within the button image, the meter image E1B is not displayed in the button pressing effect. It is not limited, and the meter image E1B may be displayed. In this case, the meter image E1B may be arranged within the button image E1F. After that, a point giving effect may be executed, and an effect of increasing the meter value may be executed.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the in-button-image meter effects A and B are executed during one variation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The effects A and B may be executed over a plurality of variable effects.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, in the button image meter effect B, the timer image E1E is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the timer image E1E may be displayed in a count-up manner in which the timer value counts up. In this case, when a predetermined value is reached, the above-described button pressing effect can be executed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, one timer image is displayed in the meter effect B within the button image, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be displayed at the same time.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and an operation unit operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a first operation unit image representing the operation unit,
the second display effect is a effect of displaying a predetermined meter and displaying the meter in one of a plurality of modes;
the third display effect is a effect of displaying the meter and performing a predetermined display when the meter is in the first mode among the plurality of modes;
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed, and in the combination effect, when the first display effect is being performed. , the second display effect is performed, and in the second display effect, the meter is displayed in the first operation portion image of the first display effect, and after the second display effect, the A third display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E1-2]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect in which predetermined points are awarded,
The combination effect is a effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed while the second display effect is being performed, and when the predetermined points are awarded in the fourth display effect, the fourth display effect is performed. In the display effect of 2, a display is performed in which the meter is set to a second mode to a third mode different from the first mode,
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1, characterized by:
[Aspect E1-3]
The predetermined display performed in the third display effect is a display that may be performed adjacent to the first operation unit image,
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1 or aspect E1-2, characterized by:
[Aspect E1-4]
the predetermined display performed in the third display effect is a timer display;
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-3, characterized by:
[Aspect E1-5]
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The combination effect is a effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the third display effect,
The fifth display effect is a second operation portion image representing the operation portion and prompting the player to operate the operation portion when the timer value of the timer display reaches a predetermined value. is displayed,
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-4, characterized by:
[Aspect E1-6]
In the third display effect, when the meter is in the first mode among the plurality of modes is when the value of the meter reaches the maximum value.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-5, characterized by:

94 and 95, the in-button image display effect will be described below. This display effect in the button image is executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern (during one variation effect) (for example, at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, during the reach effect (super reach effect)), or during the jackpot game. can be

[Inside button image display effect A]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the intra-button-image display effect A. FIG.
In the button image meter effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 94A, a button meter display effect is executed. In this button meter display effect, a button image E2A and a meter image E2B are displayed. The button image E2A is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is anticipated that the effect using the effect button 63 will be executed from now on. The meter image E2B is a meter with a moving meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the drawing), and the movement of the meter area represents the meter value. Further, the meter image E2B is arranged horizontally below and adjacent to the button image E2A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(B), a point giving effect is executed. In this point giving effect, a button image E2A, a meter image E2B, and a point acquisition image E2C are displayed. This point giving effect can be executed multiple times. The point acquisition image E2C is an image suggesting that predetermined points have been awarded, in other words, that the player has acquired predetermined points. The point acquisition image E2C in FIG. 94(B) shows that 4 points (4P) have been awarded to the player (the player has acquired 4 points). In addition, the meter image E2B arranged adjacent to the button image E2A shows that the meter area has been enlarged by the points and the meter value has increased due to the points given. The meter value of the meter image E2B increases each time the point giving effect is executed. That is, the meter value of the meter image E2B represents the cumulative value of the acquired points. This point-giving production is a reach production, a super reach production, a chance-up production (jackpot expectation level suggestion production), a jackpot announcement production, a reach development destination announcement production, a pending change announcement, a look-ahead production, a pending expectation level suggestion production, or pseudo It can be started according to execution of various effects such as continuous effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(C), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, a button image E2A, a meter image E2B, and a chance-up image E2D are displayed. In the meter image E2B arranged adjacent to the button image E2A, the meter area is enlarged, indicating that the meter value has reached the maximum (MAX). The chance-up image E2D is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX).The chance-up image E2D in FIG. !" is displayed. The chance up image E2D is displayed in the button image E2A.

[Inside button image display effect B]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the intra-button-image display effect B. FIG.
In the in-button-image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 95A, similarly to FIG. 94A, the button meter display effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 95(B), the point giving effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 94(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(C), the meter MAX notification effect is executed. In this meter MAX notification effect, a button image E2A, a meter image E2B, and a meter value suggestion image E2E are displayed. In the meter image E2B arranged adjacent to the button image E2A, the meter area is enlarged to show that the meter value has reached the maximum (MAX). The meter value suggesting image E2E is an image that is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX) and suggests that the meter value has reached the maximum (MAX). Also, the meter value suggesting image E2E is displayed within the button image E2A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(D), a button pressing effect is executed. In this button pressing effect, a button image E2F, a meter value suggestion image E2E, and a meter image E2B are displayed. The button image E2F is displayed in the same size as the button image E2A, and is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. It is an image showing that. Specifically, the button image E2F is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image representing a state in which the color of the button image E2A is darkened and/or a state in which the button image E2A is lit. is. Adjacent to the button image E2F, the characters "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. FIG. It should be noted that the valid operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E2F disappears after the effective operation period has passed. The meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed within the button image E2F. Note that the meter value suggesting image E2E may be displayed adjacent to the button image E2F instead of within the button image E2F, or may be displayed within the meter image E2B. Also, the meter value of the meter image E2B in FIG. 95(D) represents the maximum (MAX). In addition, not only this but the meter value of the meter image E2B may return to the initial value (there is no meter area|region).

After the button pressing effect, when the player presses the effect button 63 by the button pressing effect, a predetermined effect is executed. Predetermined productions include reach production, super reach production, chance-up production (jackpot expectation level suggestion production), jackpot announcement production, reach development destination announcement production, pending change announcement, timer display production, or pre-reading start announcement, etc. A rendition can be performed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the display effect in the button image is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, in the in-button-image display effects A and B, when the button image E2A is displayed, the meter image E2B is displayed, and the meter image E2B is displayed. , the chance up image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed when the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX). According to this configuration, the player who sees the chance-up image E2D or the meter value suggesting image E2E can associate execution of the button effect using the effect button 63 . Therefore, when the button effect is actually performed, it is possible to give the player a great sense of anticipation for the big win with respect to the button effect. Further, since the predetermined effect is executed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed, it is possible to create a sense of surprise in the predetermined effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, in the button image display effects A and B, the point giving effect is executed while the meter image E1B is being displayed. , the point acquisition image E2C is displayed, and when predetermined points are given, the meter area is enlarged by the points given in the meter image E2B, and the display with the increased meter value is executed. According to this configuration, since the meter value of the meter image increases as points are awarded, the player can recognize the increase in the meter value due to the acquisition of points. Therefore, since the chance up image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E can be displayed according to the change in the meter value, it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement and improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, in the button image display effect B, the meter value indication indicating that the meter value of the meter image E2B is the maximum (MAX) is displayed in the meter MAX notification effect. The image E2E is displayed in the area where the button image E2A was displayed. According to this configuration, when the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX), the player is reminded that the button performance using the performance button 63 will be executed before the button pressing performance. can be done. Therefore, when the button effect (including the button pressing effect) is actually executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for a big win with respect to the button effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, in the button image display effect B, when the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX), the player is asked to press the effect button 63. A button image E2F prompting is displayed, and a meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the area where the button image E2F is displayed. According to this configuration, display of the meter value suggesting image E2E in the area where the button image E2F is displayed can give the player a feeling of expectation for a big win in a predetermined effect developed by pressing the effect button 63. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, in the button image display effects A and B, the chance up image E2D and the meter value suggesting image E2E are displayed when the meter value of the meter image E2B is Executed at maximum (MAX). According to this configuration, the display of the chance-up image E2D and the meter value suggestive image E2E is performed when the meter value of the meter image E2B is a predetermined value before the maximum (MAX), compared to the case where the chance-up image E2D and the meter value suggestion image E2E are displayed. It is possible to increase expectations for a big win when the image E2D and the meter value suggestive image E2E are displayed. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the in-button-image display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, in the intra-button-image display effects A and B, the meter image E2B is arranged adjacently below the button image E2A. is not limited to this. For example, the meter image E2B may be displayed within the button image E2A. With this configuration, the player can associate the button effect using the effect button 63 with the meter display. Therefore, when a button effect is actually performed in relation to the meter display, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation for the button effect, and other effects than the button effect are performed in relation to the meter display. When done, the player can be given a sense of surprise. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved. Further, the meter image E2B may be arranged in a predetermined direction with a predetermined distance from the button image E2A.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, in the button image display effects A and B, when the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX), the button image E2A is displayed. The chance-up image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the area (within the button image E2A), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX), an image suggesting a pseudo continuous effect, an image suggesting a ready-to-win notice, and a jackpot expectation are displayed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed (within the button image E2A). Various images, such as an image suggesting that the good.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, in the in-button-image display effect B, in the button-pressing effect, a meter-value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the area where the button image E2F is displayed (within the button image E2F). Although shown, the invention is not so limited. In the button pressing effect, for example, in the area where the button image E2F is displayed (inside the button image E2F), a chance-up image E2D, an image suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect, an image suggesting a ready-to-win advance notice, and a jackpot expectation are added. Various images such as suggestive images may be displayed, and various effects such as a predetermined character moving effect may be executed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed (within the button image E2A).

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the meter value of the meter image E2B in the in-button-image display effects A and B increases as points are awarded. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, during the button meter display effect, the meter value of the meter image E2B is at a predetermined value (for example, the maximum value), and the meter area may be reduced and the meter value may drop due to the award of points in the point award effect. good. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0), the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 94(C) or the meter MAX notification effect shown in FIG. 95(C) may be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the meter value of the meter image E2B in the in-button-image display effects A and B increases as points are awarded. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of awarding points through a point awarding effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the meter area is expanded and the meter value is increased by executing a predetermined action. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 94(C) and the meter MAX notification effect shown in FIG. 95(C) are executed. It should be noted that "execution of a predetermined action" means, for example, execution of a pseudo-coup, change of a hold icon (display of a hold change), and execution of a predetermined chance-up effect. and successful completion of a given challenge (game).

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, in the in-button-image display effects A and B, the chance-up effect and the meter MAX notification effect are such that the meter value of the meter image E2B is the maximum value (MAX ), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect and the meter MAX notification effect may be executed not when the meter value of the meter image E2B is the maximum value (MAX), but when it becomes a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value. The predetermined value may be, for example, a half value or a quarter value of the meter value. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be added to the meter area of the meter image E2B so that the player can understand the predetermined value.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94, after the chance-up image E2D is displayed in the chance-up effect in the in-button-image display effect A, the meter value of the meter image E2B is set to the initial value (0). may be set back to . After that, a point giving effect may be executed, and an effect of increasing the meter value may be executed.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, after the meter image E2B is displayed by the button pressing effect in the button image display effect B, the meter value of the button image E2A is set to the initial value (0 ). After that, a point giving effect may be executed, and an effect of increasing the meter value may be executed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the in-button-image display effects A and B are executed during one variation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The effects A and B may be executed over a plurality of variable effects.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and an operation unit operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a first operation unit image representing the operation unit,
the second display effect is a effect of displaying a predetermined meter and displaying the meter in one of a plurality of modes;
the third display effect is a effect of displaying the meter and performing a predetermined display when the meter is in the first mode among the plurality of modes;
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed after the second display effect is performed, and the first display effect is performed while the third display effect is being performed. and in the third display effect, when the meter is in the first mode, the predetermined display is performed in an area where the first operation unit image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E2-2]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect in which predetermined points are awarded,
The combination effect is a effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed while the second display effect is being performed, and when the predetermined points are awarded in the fourth display effect, the fourth display effect is performed. A display is performed in which the meter of the display effect of 2 is set to a second mode to a third mode different from the first mode,
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1, characterized by:
[Aspect E2-3]
the predetermined display performed in the third display effect is a display suggesting that the meter has changed to the first mode;
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1 or aspect E2-2, characterized by:
[Aspect E2-4]
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed while the second display effect is being performed, and the meter of the second display effect is the first display effect of the first display effect. displayed in the operation unit image of 1,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-3, characterized by:
[Aspect E2-5]
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is a effect of displaying a second operation portion image representing the operation portion and prompting the player to operate the operation portion,
The combination effect is a effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed when the meter is in the first mode among the plurality of modes in the third display effect, and then the second operation section is performed. the predetermined display is performed in the area where the image is displayed;
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-4, characterized by:
[Aspect E2-6]
In the third display effect, when the meter is in the first mode among the plurality of modes is when the value of the meter reaches the maximum value.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-5, characterized by:

The multiple variation effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98. FIG. This multiple variation effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols over multiple variations (including reach effect (super reach effect)).

[Multiple variation production A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the multiple variation effect A. FIG.
In the multiple variation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 96(A), the variation meter display effect is executed. In this variable meter display effect, a pending icon E3 and a meter image E3C are displayed. The pending icons E3 are composed of a first pending icon E3B (maximum eight) representing pending and a second pending icon E3A representing the pending. In addition, in order to simplify the explanation, only the first reserved icons (maximum four) corresponding to the reserved special figure 1 are shown in the figure among the first reserved icons E3B. That is, in the drawing, the first pending icon E3B corresponds to the pending image 9A. Hereafter, in the multiple variation production, it will be shown in the same way.

The meter image E3C is a meter with a moving meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the figure), and the movement of the meter area represents the meter value. Moreover, the meter image E3C is vertically arranged on the right end of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), the variable point giving effect is executed. This variable point giving effect is an effect executed during the same variable effect as the variable meter display effect described above, and a pending icon E3, a meter image E3C, and a point acquisition image E3D are displayed. The variable point giving effect can be executed multiple times during the same variable effect. The point acquisition image E3D is an image suggesting that predetermined points have been awarded, in other words, that the player has obtained predetermined points. The point acquisition image E3D in FIG. 96(B) shows that 2 points (2P) have been awarded to the player (the player has acquired 2 points). Further, in the meter image E3C, since the points have been given, the meter area corresponding to the points has been expanded compared to when the variable meter display effect was performed, and the meter value has increased. The meter value of the meter image E3C increases each time points are awarded. That is, the meter value of the meter image E3C represents the cumulative value of the acquired points. This variable point granting production is a reach production, a super reach production, a chance up production (a production that suggests the expectation of a big hit), a big hit announcement production, a notice of the development of reach, a notice of pending change, a look-ahead production, a production that suggests the expectation of a hold, or , a pseudo-continuous effect, etc. can be started in response to execution of various effects. Similarly, the next variation point giving effect, which will be described later, can also be executed in response to the execution of these various effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(C), the next variation point giving effect is executed. This next variable point imparting effect is an effect that is executed during the next variable effect after the above-described variation meter display effect and the variable point imparting effect (the variation). An image E3C and a point acquisition image E3D are displayed. The next variation point giving performance can be executed multiple times during the same variation performance. The point acquisition image E3D shown in FIG. 96(C) indicates that 5 points (5P) have been awarded to the player (the player has acquired 5 points). Further, in the meter image E3C, since the points have been awarded, the meter area corresponding to the points has been expanded compared to when the variation point is awarded, and the meter value has increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(D), a button pressing effect is executed. This button pressing effect is an effect executed during the same variable effect as the next variable point giving effect described above, and the button image E3E, the hold icon E3 and the meter image E3C are displayed. The button image E3E is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the valid operation period. Specifically, the button image E3E is an image that is represented as "PUSH" in the image and represents a state as if it were lit. Adjacent to the button image E3E, the characters "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. FIG. It should be noted that the valid operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E3E disappears after the effective operation period has passed. Also, the meter value of the meter image E3C in FIG. 96(D) represents the maximum (MAX).

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(E), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, a pending icon E3 and a chance-up image E3F are displayed. The chance up image E3F is an image suggesting an up chance, and is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX). In the chance-up image E3F of FIG. 96(E), the character "It's hot!!" is displayed, which suggests that the expectation of a big win is high. The chance-up image E3F is represented as an utterance of the teammate character CRA.

[Multiple variation production B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the multiple variation effect B. FIG.
In the multiple variation effect B, as shown in FIGS. 97(A) to 97(E), the variation meter display effect, the variable point giving effect, the next variable point giving effect, the button pressing effect, and the chance up effect are performed. executed. These effects are basically the variable meter display effect shown in FIGS. 96(A) to 96(E), the variable point giving effect, the next variable point giving effect, the button pressing effect, and the chance up effect. are basically the same, but in the multiple variation effect B, the button image E3G is displayed in the variation meter display effect, the variable point giving effect, and the next variable point giving effect. This button image E3G is arranged substantially in the center of the display screen 7a, is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and has a premonition that the effect using the effect button 63 will be executed from now on.

[Multiple variation production C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the multiple variation effect C. FIG.
In the multiple variation effect C, as shown in FIG. 98(A), the variation meter display effect is executed. In this variable meter display effect, a hold icon E3 similar to that in FIG. 96(A), a button image E3G similar to that in FIG. 97(A), and a meter image E3H are displayed. The meter image E3H is a meter whose meter area (represented by cross hatching in the figure) moves, and the meter area moves to represent the meter value, and the area where the button image E3G is displayed (within the button image E3G). placed in

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), the variable point giving effect is executed. This variable point giving effect is an effect that is executed during the same variable effect as the above-described variable meter display effect, and the same pending icon E3 as in FIG. 96(B) and the same point as in FIG. An acquired image E3D, a button image E3G similar to that shown in FIG. 97B, and a meter image E3H are displayed. This variable point imparting effect can be executed multiple times during the same variable effect. The meter image E3H shows that the meter area for the points is enlarged as compared with the time when the variable meter display effect is performed, and the meter value is increased by giving the points. The meter value of the meter image E3H increases each time points are awarded. That is, the meter value of the meter image E3H represents the cumulative value of the acquired points.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(C), the next variation point giving effect is executed. This next variable point giving effect is a effect that is executed during the next variable effect after the variation (pertinent change) in which the above-mentioned variable meter display effect and the relevant variable point giving effect are executed. A similar pending icon E3, a point acquisition image E3D similar to that of FIG. 96(C), a button image E3G similar to that of FIG. 97(C), and a meter image E3H are displayed. This next variation point giving effect can be executed multiple times during the same variation effect. The meter image E3H shows that the meter area for the points is expanded as compared with the time when the variable point is given, and the meter value is increased due to the points being given.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(D), a button pressing effect is executed. This button pressing effect is an effect that is executed during the same variable effect as the next variable point giving effect described above. , and a meter image E3H are displayed. The meter image E3H is displayed in the area where the button image E3E is displayed (within the button image E3E). The meter value of the meter image E3H in FIG. 98(D) represents the maximum (MAX).

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(E), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a pending icon E3, a button image E3G, a meter image E3H, and a timer image E3I are displayed. The timer image E3I is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. The timer image E3I shown in FIG. 98(E) shows "100 seconds" as the timer initial value. This timer image E3I is displayed adjacent to the button image E3G. Incidentally, when the timer value of the timer image E3I becomes "0 seconds", a predetermined effect, for example, a chance-up effect as shown in FIG. 97(E) may be executed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the multiple variation effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the multiple variation performances A to C, the point giving performance is executed across a plurality of continuous variation performances. The meter images E3C and E3H representing the cumulative value of the acquired points (cumulative points) are displayed. When the meter value (accumulated points) of the meter image reaches the maximum (MAX), a button depression effect is executed in which a button image E3E is displayed to prompt the player to press the effect button 63. FIG. A chance-up effect, a timer display effect, etc. are executed according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. According to this configuration, even if the accumulated points do not reach the maximum (MAX) in one variable performance, the points are taken over to the next variable performance, so that the player can, over a plurality of variable performances, You can enjoy the production that earns points. In addition, when the accumulated points acquired over a plurality of variable performances reach the maximum (MAX), the button pressing performance is executed, so that the button pressing performance can be emphasized. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, in the multiple variable performances B and C, the point giving performance is executed across a plurality of continuous variable performances. The meter images E3C and E3H representing the cumulative value of the acquired points (cumulative points) are displayed. The button image E3G is displayed while the meter images E3C and E3H are being displayed. According to this configuration, the execution of the button performance using the performance button 63 can be anticipated by accumulating points, so that the player can be given a feeling of excitement and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, the meter image E3H representing the cumulative value of acquired points (cumulative points) is displayed in the area where the button image E3G is displayed (button image E3G). According to this configuration, the player can associate the button effect using the effect button 63 with the meter display. Therefore, when a button effect is actually performed in relation to the meter display, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation for the button effect, and other effects than the button effect are performed in relation to the meter display. When done, the player can be given a sense of surprise. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, in the multiple variation effects A and B, after the button pressing effect, a chance-up effect, which is a effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win, is executed. According to this configuration, the chance-up performance suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win is executed based on the points accumulated across a plurality of variable performances, so that the chance-up performance suggests a high degree of expectation for a big win. can raise the expectations of As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, in the multiple variation effect C, the timer display effect is executed after the button pressing effect. According to this configuration, the timer display effect is executed based on the points accumulated across a plurality of variable effects, so the effect that the expectation of a big win is high when the timer value of the timer image E3I becomes 0 seconds. It is possible to raise expectations for the execution of As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the multiple variation effects A to C, the chance up effect or the timer display effect is the maximum (MAX) meter value of the meter images E3C and E3H. sometimes executed. According to this configuration, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is executed when the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are at a predetermined value before the maximum (MAX), and the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are performed. It is possible to increase expectations for a big win when the game develops into a timer display effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the multiple variation effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the multiple variation performances A to C, as part of the look-ahead performance (continuous performance spanning multiple variations), the point grant performance or the next variation point grant A configuration in which points are given in the effect (a configuration in which points are obtained over a plurality of variable effects as part of the look-ahead effect) may be employed. According to this configuration, every time a point is obtained, the expectation for the big win can be increased, and as a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, the accumulated points are represented by the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H in the multiple variation effects A to C, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the accumulated points may be expressed numerically instead of by meter values. Also, the accumulated points may be indicated by numerically expressing the remaining points until the accumulated points reach the maximum (MAX).

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, the button image is displayed when the chance up effect or the timer display effect is performed in the multiple variation effects A to C, and the chance up effect or the timer display effect is performed. A display effect may be performed within the button image. Also, the point acquisition image E3D may be displayed within the button image.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H in the multi-variation productions A to C are increased by giving points. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, during the variable meter display effect, the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are at a predetermined value (for example, the maximum value), and the meter area decreases and the meter value drops as points are given in the point giving effect. may be configured. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0), the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 96(C) or the timer display effect shown in FIG. 98(C) may be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H in the multiple-variation productions A to C are increased by giving points. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of awarding points through a point awarding effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the meter area is expanded and the meter value is increased by executing a predetermined action. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 96(C) and the timer display effect shown in FIG. 98(C) are executed. It should be noted that "execution of a predetermined action" means, for example, execution of a pseudo-coup, change of a hold icon (display of a hold change), and execution of a predetermined chance-up effect. and successful completion of a given challenge (game).

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the multiple variation effects A to C, the chance up effect and the timer display effect cause the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H to reach the maximum value (MAX). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect may be executed not when the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are the maximum value (MAX) but when they reach a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value. The predetermined value may be, for example, a half value or a quarter value of the meter value. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be added to the meter area of the meter image E1B so that the player can understand the predetermined value.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, the timer image E3I is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value is counted down in the multiple variation effect C, but the present invention is limited to this. isn't it. For example, the timer image E3I may be displayed in a count-up manner in which the timer value counts up. In this case, when a predetermined value is reached, the above-described button pressing effect can be executed. Also, a plurality of timer images E3I may be displayed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the multiple variation effects A to C are executed during a plurality of continuous variation effects, but the present invention is not limited to this. C may be performed for one variation effect.

[Modification 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is executed after the button-pressing effect in the multiple-variation effects A to C, but the present invention is not limited to this. Other effects may be executed after the effect. Other productions include pseudo-continuous production, reach production, super reach production, chance-up production (suggestion of jackpot expectation level production), jackpot announcement production, reach development destination announcement production, pending change announcement, or pre-reading start announcement. It may be a configuration in which production can be executed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect E3-1]
a symbol display means capable of performing symbol variation display to stop after starting the variation display of symbols;
effect display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects;
an operation unit operable by a player;
A gaming machine comprising
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect in which predetermined points are acquired over a plurality of consecutive symbol fluctuation displays, and a point suggestion display is performed to suggest the accumulated points acquired,
the second display effect is a effect of displaying a first operation portion image representing the operation portion and prompting the player to operate the operation portion;
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the accumulated points in the first display effect reach a predetermined value, the second display effect is performed, and the player operates the operation unit. Depending on, a predetermined production will be performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E3-2]
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is a effect of displaying a second operation unit image representing the operation unit,
The combination effect is a effect that may include a third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect may be performed while the first display effect is being performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-1, characterized by:
[Aspect E3-3]
In the combination effect, the point suggestion display in the first display effect may be performed in an area where the second operation unit image is displayed in the third display effect.
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-2, characterized by:
[Aspect E3-4]
The predetermined production is a production including a display that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-3, characterized by:
[Aspect E3-5]
The predetermined effect is a effect including a timer display,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-4, characterized by:
[Aspect E3-6]
Equipped with a look-ahead effect execution means capable of executing a look-ahead effect,
In the first display effect, a predetermined point is obtained over a plurality of consecutive symbol fluctuation displays as the look-ahead effect,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-5, characterized by:
[Aspect E3-7]
In the combination effect, when the second display effect is performed, it is when the accumulated points reach the maximum value.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-6, characterized by:

The operation charge effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. This operation charge effect is performed in parallel with the variation effect of the decorative pattern. Of course, this includes the execution of a reach effect (super reach effect).

[Operation charge effect A (success)]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the operation charge effect A (success).
First, in the operation charge effect A (success), as shown in FIG. 99(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start production, the decoration pattern during fluctuation is displayed on the upper left. Further, pending images 9A and 9B and a pending digested image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The pending images 9A and 9B and the pending digested image 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(B), a sword movement effect is executed. In the sword movement effect, a sword image KG showing the sword member 64 appears from above on the right side of the screen and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 99(C), a sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG moving downward in the sword movement effect stops.

The sword image KG has its hilt portion divided into a plurality of areas. Specifically, it is divided into six adjacent regions R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, and R6. The drawing color of these regions R1 to R6 is initially blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 99(D), a charge effect (initial) is executed. In the charge effect (initial stage), the drawing color of the region R1 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. Then, the drawing color is changed from blue to red in a predetermined order such as regions R2->R3->R4->R5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(E), a charge effect (final stage) is executed. In the charging effect (final stage), the rendering color of the region R6 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. This is a change following the above-described change in the drawing color of the region R5.
Next, as shown in FIG. 99(F), a button press instruction effect is executed. In the button press instruction rendering, an image is displayed to instruct pressing of the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 . Specifically, a text image TG saying "Push!" is displayed together with an arrow image YG for instructing the pressing of the button image BG.

[Operation charge effect A (failure)]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the operation charge effect A (failure).
First, in the operation charge effect A (failure), as shown in FIG. 100(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start production, the decoration pattern during fluctuation is displayed on the upper left. Further, pending images 9A and 9B and a pending digested image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The pending images 9A and 9B and the pending digested image 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(B), a sword movement effect is executed. In the sword movement effect, a sword image KG showing the sword member 64 appears on the right side of the screen from above and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100(C), a sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG moving downward in the sword movement effect stops.

The sword image KG has its hilt portion divided into a plurality of areas. Specifically, it is divided into six adjacent regions R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, and R6. The drawing color of these regions R1 to R6 is initially blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100(D), a charge effect (initial) is executed. In the charge effect (initial stage), the drawing color of the region R1 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. Next, the drawing color of the region R2 is changed from blue to red.
100(A) to 100(D), the variable start effect, the sword movement effect, the sword stop effect, and the charge effect (initial) are the same effect as the operation charge effect (success) shown in FIG. It has become.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(E), the charge effect (mid-term) is executed. In the charge effect (mid-term), the rendering color of the region R3 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. This change follows the change in the drawing color of the region R2 described above.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100(F), a variable continuation effect is executed. In the variable continuation effect, the sword image KG is not displayed, and the effect is the same as the variable start effect shown in FIG. 100(A). In other words, when the region R3 changes from blue to red, the charge effect is interrupted and the same effect as the variable start effect is performed.

[Operation charge effect B]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the operation charge effect B. FIG.
First, in the operation charge effect B, as shown in FIG. 101(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start production, the decoration pattern during fluctuation is displayed on the upper left. Further, pending images 9A and 9B and a pending digested image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The pending images 9A and 9B and the pending digested image 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(B), a charge announcement effect is executed. In the charge notice effect, the charge notice image is displayed while the button image BB1 indicating the effect button 63 is displayed. Here, an elliptical charge notice image JG1 marked with "C" is shown. The button image BB1 has five areas S1, S2, S3, S4, and S5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(C), a charging effect is executed. In the charge effect, the drawing color of the area of the button image BB1 is changed from blue to red, triggered by the appearance of the charge notice image in the charge notice effect described above. Here, the state in which the region S1 has changed from blue to red is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(D), a charge announcement effect is executed. The charge advance notice effect is the effect explained in FIG. 101B, and here, an elliptical charge advance notice image JG2 marked with "C×4" is shown. As the charge notice image, "C×2", "C×3", "C×4", and "C×5" are prepared separately from the charge image "C". The number of regions to be changed from blue to red is determined by the numerical value written behind the "x".

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(E), a charging effect is executed. The charge effect is the effect described in FIG. 101(C), and the drawing color of the area of the button image BB1 is changed from blue to red when the charge notice image appears. Here, four areas S2 to S5 are changed from blue to red to correspond to the charge notice image JG2 of "C×4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(F), a button press instruction effect is executed. In the button pressing instruction effect, an image for instructing pressing of the effect button 63 is displayed. Specifically, a text image TG reading "Push!" is displayed.

[Effect example]
Examples of the effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of areas as shown in FIGS. When the drawing color of all areas is changed to red, the button press instruction effect is executed. According to this configuration, the change in the drawing color leads to the expectations of the player, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
As shown in FIGS. 101(B) and 101(D), the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment displays a charge notice image as charge notice effect. Triggered by the display of this charge notice image, a charge effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 101(C) and 101(E). That is, the plurality of regions S1 to S5 are changed from blue to red in a predetermined order. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation by displaying the charge notice image, and to improve interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the charging notice image JG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 101(B), one area S1 is drawn in the charging effect as shown in FIG. The color is changed from blue to red. On the other hand, when the charge notice image JG2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 101(D), the drawing color of the two or more regions S2 to S5 is changed from blue to red as shown in FIG. 101(E). be done. According to this configuration, the degree of expectation of the player can be varied depending on the type of charge notice image, and interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of adjacent regions R1 to R6. According to this configuration, the charge effect becomes easy to understand, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when all the drawing colors of the regions R1 to R6 become red as shown in FIG. 99(E), a button press instruction effect is executed as shown in FIG. 99(F). be done. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 100(E), even if the drawing color of the regions R1 to R3 is red, if the regions R4 to R6 are blue, the button press instruction effect is not executed. According to this configuration, expectations are raised as to whether the charging effect will be successful, and interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Modifications of the present embodiment are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, when the drawing color of all the regions R1 to R6 of the sword image KG becomes red, the button press instruction effect is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, when the drawing color of all the areas B1 to B5 of the button image BB1 becomes red, the button press instruction effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the button pressing instruction effect may be executed when the drawing color of a part of the area turns red.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the handle portion of the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of areas S1 to S6 as shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, the entire sword image KG may be divided into a plurality of areas.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the drawing color of the area is changed from blue to red, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if a wireframe display is performed in which the color of the area is the same color as the background color, and the drawing color of the area of the wireframe image is changed (painted) good.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect E4-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying an image of the operation means,
The image of the operation means has a plurality of areas,
By changing the drawing color of the plurality of areas from the first drawing color to the second drawing color in a predetermined order, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of transition to the operable state of the operation means. Amusement machine.
[Aspect E4-2]
A specific image can be displayed at a predetermined timing during fluctuation,
Triggered by the display of the specific image, the gaming machine changes the drawing color of the plurality of areas from a first drawing color to a second drawing color in a predetermined order.
[Aspect E4-3]
When the first specific image among the specific images is displayed, the drawing color of one of the plurality of regions is changed, and when the second specific image among the specific images is displayed, the plurality of A gaming machine characterized by changing the drawing color of two or more areas out of the areas.
[Aspect E4-4]
A gaming machine, wherein the image of the operation means is divided into a plurality of adjacent areas.
[Aspect E4-5]
When the drawing colors of the plurality of areas all become the second drawing color, the operation means becomes operable, and when the drawing colors of the plurality of areas include areas other than the second drawing color, the operation means A gaming machine characterized in that it does not enter an operable state.

The pseudo consecutive point effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. FIG. This pseudo consecutive point effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols (during one variation effect) (for example, at the start of the variation of the decorative symbols or during the ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect)).

[Pseudo consecutive point effect A]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo consecutive point effect A. FIG.
In the pseudo consecutive point effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 102(A), the pseudo consecutive effect is executed. In this pseudo-continuation effect, a pseudo-continuation suggestive image E5A and a meter image E5B are displayed. The pseudo-continuous suggestive image E5A is an image reminiscent of the pseudo-continuous effect, and more specifically, "pseudo × 2" is shown to suggest that the pseudo-continuous effect is the second time. Further, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 patterns, and the decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the logo pattern suggesting the pseudo continuous effect. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in the manner of "7, logo symbol, 7". The meter image E5B is a meter with a moving meter area (represented by cross hatching in the figure), and the meter value is represented by the movement of the meter area. Further, the meter image E5B is vertically arranged at the right end of the display screen 7a. The pseudo-continuous effect can be executed again after the point giving effect.

The pseudo-continuous effect is a effect that is executed at the start of the variable change or during the ready-to-win effect. An effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part, an effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping a predetermined logo, or a display reminiscent of a pseudo-continuation such as “x2”, “x3”, “pseudo”, Including the effect to execute the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(B), a point giving effect is executed. This point giving effect is executed in response to the execution of the above-described pseudo-continuous effect, and a meter image E5B and a point acquisition image E5C are displayed. This point-giving effect can be executed when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed again during the same variable effect, or according to another effect. That is, the point giving effect can be executed multiple times during the same variable effect. The point acquisition image E5C is an image suggesting that predetermined points have been awarded, in other words, that the player has obtained predetermined points. The point acquisition image E5C in FIG. 102(B) indicates that 5 points (5P) have been awarded to the player (the player has acquired 5 points). Further, in the meter image E5B, since the points are given, the meter area corresponding to the points is enlarged compared to when the variable meter is displayed, and the meter value is increased. The meter value of the meter image E5B increases each time points are awarded. That is, the meter value of the meter image E5B represents the cumulative value of acquired points.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(C), a button pressing effect is executed. In this button pressing effect, a button image E5D and a meter image E5B are displayed. The button image E5D is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in the valid operation period. Specifically, the button image E5D is an image that is represented as "PUSH" in the image and represents a state as if it were lit. Adjacent to the button image E5D, the characters "PUSH!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. It should be noted that the valid operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E3E disappears after the effective operation period has passed. Further, the meter image E5B in FIG. 102(C) represents that the meter value is maximum (MAX).

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(D), a chance-up effect is executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 within the effective operation period. In this chance-up effect, a chance-up image E5E is displayed. The chance up image E5E is an image suggesting an up chance, and is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX). In the chance-up image E5E of FIG. 102(D), the characters "It's super hot!!" suggesting that the expectation of a big win is high. The chance-up image E5E is represented as an utterance of the teammate character CRA.

[Pseudo consecutive point effect B]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo consecutive point effect B. FIG.
As for the pseudo consecutive point effect B, a pseudo consecutive effect is executed as shown in FIG. 103(A). In this pseudo-continuation effect, a pseudo-continuation suggestive image E5A, a button image E5G, and a meter image E5F similar to those in FIG. 102(A) are displayed. The button image E5G is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is anticipated that the effect using the effect button 63 will be executed from now on. The meter image E5F is a meter with a moving meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the drawing), and the movement of the meter area represents the meter value. Further, the meter image E5F is arranged horizontally in the area (within the button image E5G) where the button image E5G is displayed. Further, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 patterns, similarly to FIG. 102(A), and the decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the logo design suggesting the pseudo continuous effect. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in the manner of "7, logo symbol, 7". The pseudo-continuous effect can be executed again after the point giving effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(B), a point giving effect is executed. This point giving effect is executed in response to the execution of the above-described pseudo-continuous effect, and a button image E5G, a meter image E5F, and a point acquisition image E5C similar to FIG. 102(B) are displayed. This point-giving effect can be executed again when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed again during the same variable effect, or according to another effect. That is, the point award effect can be executed multiple times. Further, in the meter image E5F arranged in the button image E5G, since the points are given, the meter area corresponding to the points is enlarged compared to when the variable meter is displayed, and the meter value is increased. ing. The meter value of the meter image E5F increases each time points are awarded. That is, the meter value of the meter image E5F represents the cumulative value of the acquired points.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(C), a button pressing effect is executed. In this button pressing effect, a button image E5D and a meter image E5F similar to those in FIG. 102(C) are displayed. The meter image E5F is arranged in the area where the button image E5D is displayed, that is, within the button image E5D. Further, the meter image E5F in FIG. 103(C) represents that the meter value is maximum (MAX). The button image E5D has the same shape as the button image E5G.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D), the timer display effect is executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 within the effective operation period. In this timer display effect, a button image E3G, a meter image E5F, and a timer image E5H similar to those in FIG. 103(A) are displayed. The timer image E5H is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. A timer image E5H shown in FIG. 103D shows "100 seconds" as the timer initial value. This timer image E5H is displayed adjacent to the button image E5G. Incidentally, when the timer value of the timer image E5H becomes "0 seconds", a predetermined effect, for example, a chance-up effect shown in FIG.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pseudo consecutive point effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, in the pseudo consecutive point effects A and B, the pseudo consecutive effects are executed, and the cumulative value of the points given in the point giving effects (cumulative points) is displayed using the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F, and the button image E5D is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX), and when the player presses the production button 63, the chance increases. Effects and timer display effects are executed. According to this configuration, points are accumulated according to the realization of the pseudo-continuous effect, and when the accumulated points reach the maximum (MAX), an effect such as a chance-up effect or a timer display effect can be executed. You can make it more interesting. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, the meter image E5F is displayed during the simulated consecutive point effect B, during the simulated continuous point effect, during the point giving effect, and the like. According to this configuration, the execution of the button performance using the performance button 63 can be anticipated during the pseudo-continuous performance or the point giving performance, so that the player can be given a sense of excitement and enjoyment of the game is improved. can be made

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, the meter image E5F suggesting accumulated points is arranged in the area where the button image E5G is displayed (within the button image E5G) in the pseudo consecutive point effect AB. be. According to this configuration, the player can associate the button effect using the effect button 63 with the meter display. Therefore, when a button effect is actually performed in relation to the meter display, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation for the button effect, and other effects than the button effect are performed in relation to the meter display. When done, the player can be given a sense of surprise. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102, in the pseudo consecutive point effect A, after the button pressing effect, a chance-up effect, which is a effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win, is executed. According to this configuration, the chance-up performance suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win is executed based on the points given by the pseudo-continuous performance, so there is an expectation that the chance-up performance suggests a high degree of expectation for a big win. can increase As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, in the simulated consecutive point effect B, the timer display effect is executed after the button pressing effect. According to this configuration, the timer display effect is executed based on the points given by the pseudo-continuous effect, so when the timer value of the timer image E5H reaches 0 seconds, the effect with a high expectation for a big win is executed. You can raise your expectations. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, in the pseudo consecutive point effects A and B, the chance up effect or the timer display effect has the maximum (MAX) meter value of the meter images E5B and E5G. is executed when According to this configuration, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is executed when the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5G are at a predetermined value before the maximum (MAX), and the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are performed. It is possible to increase expectations for a big win when the game develops into a timer display effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the pseudo consecutive point effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, when the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F reach the maximum (MAX) in the pseudo-continuous effects A and B, the button pressing effect is performed. In response to the pressing of the effect button 63 by the player, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F reach the maximum (MAX), the chance-up effect or timer display effect may be executed even if the player does not press the effect button 63 . Further, when the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F reach the maximum (MAX), the button pressing effect is not executed (the button image E5D is not displayed), and the chance up effect and timer display effect are executed. good too.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the accumulated points are represented by the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F in the pseudo consecutive point effects A and B. It is not limited. For example, the accumulated points may be expressed numerically instead of by meter values. Also, the accumulated points may be indicated by numerically representing the remaining points until the accumulated points reach the maximum (MAX).

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, in the pseudo consecutive point effects A and B, when the chance-up effect or timer display effect is performed, the button image is displayed. A timer display effect may be executed within the button image. Also, the point acquisition image E5C may be displayed within the button image.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F in the pseudo consecutive point effects A and B are configured to increase as points are awarded. , the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, during the pseudo continuous effect, the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F are at a predetermined value (for example, the maximum value), and the meter area decreases and the meter value drops due to the awarding of points in the point awarding effect. good too. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0), the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 102(C) or the timer display effect shown in FIG. 103(C) may be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F in the pseudo consecutive point effects A and B are configured to increase as points are awarded. , the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, instead of awarding points through a point awarding effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the meter area is expanded and the meter value is increased by executing a predetermined action. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 102(C) and the timer display effect shown in FIG. 103(C) are executed. It should be noted that "execution of a predetermined action" means, for example, execution of a pseudo-coup, change of a hold icon (display of a hold change), and execution of a predetermined chance-up effect. and successful completion of a given challenge (game).

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, in the pseudo consecutive point effects A and B, the chance-up effect and timer display effect are such that the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F are the maximum (MAX ), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect may be executed not when the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F are the maximum value (MAX) but when they reach a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value. The predetermined value may be, for example, a half value or a quarter value of the meter value. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be added to the meter area of the meter image E1B so that the player can understand the predetermined value.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, the timer image E5H is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down in the pseudo consecutive point effect B, but the present invention is limited to this. not a thing For example, the timer image E5H may be displayed in a count-up manner in which the timer value counts up. In this case, when a predetermined value is reached, the above-described button-pressing effect can be executed. Also, a plurality of timer images E5H may be displayed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pseudo consecutive point effects A and B are executed during one variable effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. , B may be executed during a plurality of successive variable presentations.

[Modification 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is executed after the button pressing effect in the pseudo consecutive point effects A and B, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the button pressing effect, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed again. Further, after the button pressing effect, after the button pressing effect, another effect may be executed. As other productions, various productions such as reach production, super reach production, chance up production (big hit expectation indication production), jackpot announcement production, reach development destination announcement production, pending change announcement, or look-ahead start announcement are executed. Any configuration may be used.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect E5-1]
effect display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects;
an operation unit operable by a player;
A gaming machine comprising
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a pseudo continuous effect,
The second display effect is a effect in which a certain point is given and a point suggestive display is given to suggest the accumulated points of the given points,
the third display effect is a effect of displaying a first operation portion image representing the operation portion and prompting the player to operate the operation portion;
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and in the second display effect, the certain point is given in response to the performance of the first display effect, and the point suggestion display is performed. After that, the third display effect is performed in response to the accumulated points reaching a predetermined value, and a predetermined effect is performed when the player operates the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E5-2]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect of displaying a second operation unit image representing the operation unit,
The combination effect is a effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect may be performed when the first display effect is being performed, or when the second display effect is being performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E5-1, characterized by:
[Aspect E5-3]
In the combination effect, the point suggestion display in the second display effect may be performed in an area where the second operation unit image is displayed in the fourth display effect.
The gaming machine according to aspect E5-2, characterized by:
[Aspect E5-4]
The predetermined production is a production including a display that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E5-1 to E5-3, characterized by:
[Aspect E5-5]
The predetermined effect is a effect including a timer display,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E5-1 to E5-4, characterized by:
[Aspect E5-6]
In the combination effect, when the third display effect is performed, it is when the accumulated points reach the maximum value.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E5-1 to E5-5, characterized by:

The timer freeze effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. FIG. This timer freeze performance can be executed during the variable performance of the decorative patterns, for example, at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, at the start of the variable performance of the decorative patterns, or during the ready-to-win performance (super ready-to-win performance).

[Timer freeze effect A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the timer freeze effect A. FIG.
First, in the timer freeze effect A, a timer display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 104(A). In this timer display effect, a timer image I1A is displayed. The timer image I1A is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. The timer image I1A shown in FIG. 104A shows "100 seconds" as the timer initial value. In addition, the ally character CRA is also displayed in the timer display effect. In the display effects shown below, the description of the teammate character CRA will be omitted unless it is particularly necessary. Also, in the upper right of FIG. 104(A), it is shown that the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are the same pattern, and that the decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating, that is, it is shown to be in a ready-to-win state. . In the following description, when such a reach state is indicated, the description will be omitted unless particularly necessary.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), a timer stop effect is executed. In the timer stop effect, the effect of stopping when the timer value of the timer image I1A is "77.7 seconds" is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104(C), the timer value stopped by the timer stop performance is reflected in the pattern array of the decorative symbols, and the jackpot notification performance is executed to report it as the jackpot pattern array.

[Timer Freeze Effect B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the timer freeze effect B. FIG.
First, in the timer freeze effect B, a timer display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 105(A). In this timer display effect, a timer image I1A and a button image I1B are displayed. The button image I1B is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is anticipated that the effect using the effect button 63 will be executed from now on. The timer image I1A is the same as the timer image I1A in FIG. 104A, the timer value is displayed in a countdown manner, and "100 seconds" is shown as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(B), a button effective display effect is executed. In the button effective display effect, a button image I1C and a timer image I1A are displayed. The button image I1C is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. Specifically, the button image I1C is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image representing a state in which the color of the button image I1B is darkened and/or a state in which the button image I1B is lit. is. Adjacent to the button image I1C, the characters "PUSH!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. FIG. The timer image I1A shows "80 seconds", indicating that the valid operation period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 starts from 80 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 105(C), a timer stop effect is executed. In this timer stop effect, an effect is executed in which the timer value of the timer image I1A is stopped at 77.7 seconds in response to the player's depression of the effect button 63 by the button valid display effect. Since the button effective display effect starts from the timer value of 80 seconds, the effect button 63 can be pressed before the timer value reaches 77.7 seconds (for example, 79 seconds). For example, 79 seconds) is changed at high speed and stopped at "77.7 seconds". Alternatively, the timer value may be stopped immediately at 77.7 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(D), similarly to FIG. 104(C), the timer value stopped by the timer stop effect is reflected in the pattern array of the decorative patterns, and the jackpot is announced as the jackpot pattern array. A notification effect is executed.

[Timer Freeze Effect C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the timer freeze effect C. FIG.
First, in the timer freeze effect C, a timer display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 106(A). In this timer display effect, a timer image I1D and a button image I1B are displayed. The button image I1B is an image suggesting the effect button 63, similarly to FIG. In the timer image I1D, the timer value is displayed in a count-up manner, and "0 second" is set as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(B), a button effective display effect is executed. In the button effective display effect, a button image I1C and a timer image I1D are displayed. The button image I1C is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period, as in FIG. 105(B). Adjacent to the button image I1C, the characters "PUSH!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. FIG. The timer image I1D shows "75 seconds", indicating that the valid operation period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 starts from 75 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 106(C), a timer stop effect is executed. In this timer stop effect, an effect is executed in which the timer value of the timer image I1A is stopped at 77.7 seconds in response to the player's depression of the effect button 63 by the button valid display effect. Since the button valid display effect starts from the timer value of 75 seconds, the effect button 63 can be pressed before the timer value reaches 77.7 seconds (for example, 76 seconds). For example, 76 seconds) is changed at high speed and stopped at "77.7 seconds". Alternatively, the timer value may be stopped immediately at 77.7 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(D), similarly to FIG. 105(D), the timer value stopped by the timer stop effect is reflected in the pattern array of the decorative patterns, and the jackpot is announced as the jackpot pattern array. A notification effect is executed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer freeze effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, timer display (display of a timer image) is executed, and the timer value of the timer display is stopped (restrained) at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds). Then, a display for notifying a big win is executed using the stopped timer value. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of surprise and improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the button image I1C is displayed while the timer display is being executed, and the timer is displayed in response to the player's operation of the production button 63. A display is executed in which the displayed timer value is stopped (stopped) at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds), and a display informing of a big win is executed using the stopped timer value. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and feel that he or she has participated in the game, thereby improving interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, when the timer value of the timer display is stopped (stopped) at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds) by the timer stop effect, When the timer value becomes a value (80 seconds or 75 seconds) before the predetermined value (77.7 seconds), the effective operation period of the production button 63 is started, and the production button 63 is operated within the effective operation period. is operated, the timer value is stopped at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of surprise, prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the effect button 63, and improve the rate of participation in the game. , and as a result, interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, after the timer value of the timer display is stopped (stopped) at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds) by the timer stop effect, the jackpot is displayed. In the notification performance, the pattern arrangement of the decorative symbols is set to be the same as the timer value (77.7 seconds) stopped in the timer stop performance, thereby reporting a big win. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel the unexpectedness, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, the timer value of the timer display is stopped (stopped) at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds), which is zero, in the timer stop effect. After that, in the big win notification performance, the pattern arrangement of the decorative patterns is set to be the same as the timer value (77.7 seconds) which becomes the double number stopped by the timer stop performance, so that the big win is reported. According to this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the big win in an easy-to-understand manner, and the player can quickly recognize the big win. As a result, interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the timer freeze effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the button image I1C is displayed while the timer display is being executed, and the player operates the effect button 63 by the display of the button image I1C. In response to this, a display is executed to stop (stop) the timer value of the timer display at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds), and a display is executed to notify a big win using the stopped timer value. The invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the button image I1C is displayed and the player does not operate the effect button 63, the timer value of the timer display is stopped (stopped) at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds). Then, the stopped timer value may be used to display a notification of a big win.
[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, after the timer value of the timer display is stopped (stopped) at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds) by the timer stop effect, the jackpot is displayed. In the notification effect, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols is set to be the same as the timer value (77.7 seconds) stopped in the timer stop effect, thereby announcing the big win, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the timer value (77.7 seconds) of the timer display stopped in the timer stop effect may be used as it is to notify the big win.
[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, the timer value to be stopped in the timer stop effect is 77.7, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, other cohorts such as 11.1, 111, 33.3 are also possible. Further, the timer value to be stopped in the timer stop effect is not limited to zero, and may be a predetermined value such as 135.
[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be the number of seconds obtained by subtracting the timer value for stopping by the timer stop effect, which will be described later, from the start number of seconds of the effective operation period. For example, when the effective operation period of the effect button 63 starts from 80 seconds and the timer value to stop by the timer stop effect is 77.7 seconds, the effective operation period may be 2.3 seconds.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer freeze effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more timer images are displayed simultaneously. good too.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect I1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
one display of the plurality of types of display is a certain display;
The certain indication may be displayed in the first aspect,
The certain indication may be displayed in a second manner,
The certain display may be displayed in a third aspect,
The certain display of the first aspect is a display of aspects including a display of counting a timer value using a timer image,
The certain display of the second mode is a mode of display including a display of stopping the timer value of the timer image at a first predetermined value,
The certain display of the third aspect is a display of aspects including a display suggesting a big win using the timer value of the timer image,
The certain display is a display that may be displayed in the first mode, then displayed in the second mode, and then displayed in the third mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect I1-2]
Equipped with an operation unit that can receive a player's operation and execute a predetermined effect by the player's operation,
The certain display may be displayed in a fourth aspect,
The certain display of the fourth aspect is a display of a mode including display of an operation unit image prompting the player to operate the operation unit,
The certain display is displayed in the fourth mode while being displayed in the first mode, and the player operates the operation section by displaying the operation section image in the fourth mode. a display that may be displayed in the second mode according to the circumstances, and may be displayed in the third mode after being displayed in the second mode,
The gaming machine according to aspect I1-1, characterized by:

[Aspect 3]
When the display of the second mode is performed in the certain display, the operation of the operation unit is valid when the timer value reaches a second predetermined value before the first predetermined value. starting a period, and stopping the timer value at the first predetermined value when the operation unit is operated within the operation valid period;
The gaming machine according to mode I1-2, characterized by:

[Aspect 4]
The third aspect is a display that suggests a big win using a decorative pattern,
When the display of the third mode is performed after the display of the second mode is performed in the certain display, the pattern arrangement of the decorative patterns is changed to the pattern arrangement of the pattern restrained in the second mode. Suggesting a jackpot by being the same as a predetermined value of 1,
The gaming machine according to any one of modes I1-1 to I1-3, characterized by:

[Aspect 5]
The pattern arrangement of the decorative pattern that is the same as the first predetermined value that is restricted in the second aspect is a corolla.
The gaming machine according to aspect I4-1, characterized by:

The chance-up meter presentation will be described below with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. FIG. This chance-up meter production is performed during a jackpot game, during a variation production of decorative patterns (for example, at the start of a variable display of special patterns, at the start of a variable production of decorative patterns, or during a reach production (super reach production)). can be executed to

[Chance up meter effect A]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up meter effect A. FIG.
In the chance-up meter effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 107A, a chance-up meter image I2A and a timer image I2B are displayed. The chance up meter image I2A includes a meter image I2AA, a cursor image I2A1, a chance up suggesting image I2A2, and a chance up schedule suggesting image I2A3. The meter image I2AA is a meter in which a meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) formed by the cursor image I2A1 moves from the start position to the end position, and the cursor image I2A1 moves from the start position to the end position. indicates the duration of the chance-up meter effect. The chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 is arranged on the meter image I2AA. When the cursor image I2A1 moves and the cursor image I2A1 overlaps (matches) the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3, the chance-up effect may be executed. When the chance-up effect is executed, the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 is changed to the chance-up completion suggestion image I2A2. The chance-up completion suggesting image I2A2 is arranged on the meter image I2AA, and suggests that the chance-up effect has been executed at that timing.

That is, in the meter image I2AA, the cursor image I2A1 moves from the start position to the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3, thereby representing the timing from the start of the chance-up meter effect to the timing at which the chance-up effect can be executed.

The timer image I2B is displayed while the chance-up meter image I2A is being displayed. For example, the timer image I2B is displayed at the start of the chance-up meter effect or at a predetermined timing after the chance-up suggestive image I2A2 is displayed. In the timer image I2B, the timer value is displayed in a countdown method, and 15 seconds is set as the initial value of the timer.

Next, the timing match display effect shown in FIG. 107(B) or the timing mismatch display effect shown in FIG. 107(D) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 107B, in the timing coincidence display effect, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timing at which the timer value in the timer image I2B reaches 0 second. A production is performed to indicate that the Note that the timing coincidence display effect is not limited to this, and the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image I2B are predetermined values (for example, 7.77 seconds).

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(C), a high expectation chance-up effect is executed. In the high-expectation chance-up presentation, a high-expectation chance-up image I2C is displayed. The high-expectation chance-up image I2C is an image that suggests that the jackpot expectation is relatively high.

On the other hand, in the timing mismatch effect shown in FIG. 107(D), the timing when the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timing when the timer value in the timer image I2B becomes 0 seconds. A production is performed to indicate that they do not match. Note that the timing mismatch display effect is not limited to this, and the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image I2B are predetermined values (for example, 7.77 seconds).

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(E), a low-expectation chance-up effect is executed. In the low-expectation chance-up presentation, a low-expectation chance-up image I2D is displayed. The low-expectation chance-up image I2D is an image that suggests that the jackpot expectation is relatively low. That is, when the low-expectation chance-up image I2D appears, the expectation for the big win is lower than when the high-expectation chance-up image I2C appears.

[Chance up meter effect B]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up meter effect B. FIG.
In the chance-up meter effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 108A, a chance-up meter image I2A, a timer image I2B, and a button image I2E are displayed. The chance-up meter image I2A and the timer image I2B are the same as in FIG. 107(A), so the description is omitted. The button image I2E is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is anticipated that the effect using the effect button 63 will be executed from now on.

Next, the timing match display effect shown in FIG. 108(B) or the timing mismatch display effect shown in FIG. 108(D) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 108(B), in the timing coincidence display effect, similar to FIG. 107(B), the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer image I2B are displayed. An effect is produced to indicate that the timing coincides with the timing at which the timer value in becomes 0 seconds.

A button image I2F is also displayed. The button image I2F is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in the valid operation period. Specifically, the button image I2F is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image representing a state in which the color of the button image I2E is darkened and/or a state in which the button image I2E is lit. is. Adjacent to the button image I2F, the characters “Press!!” are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63 . The button image I2F is displayed after the timer value of the timer image I2B reaches "0 seconds". The display is not limited to this, and may be displayed after reaching a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before the timer value reaches “0 seconds”. It should be noted that the valid operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(C), a high-expectation chance-up effect is executed. In the high-expectation-level chance-up effect, a high-expectation-level chance-up image I2C is displayed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 by displaying the button image I2F. The high-expectation chance-up image I2C is an image suggesting that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, similar to FIG. 107(C).

On the other hand, in the timing mismatch effect shown in FIG. 108D, similarly to FIG. An effect is produced to indicate that the timing at which the value becomes 0 seconds does not match. A button image I2F is also displayed. The button image I2F is the same image as in FIG. 108(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(E), a low-expectation chance-up effect is executed. In the low-expectation chance-up presentation, a low-expectation chance-up image I2D is displayed. The low-expectation chance-up image I2D is an image suggesting that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, similar to FIG. 108(E).

[Chance up meter effect C]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up meter effect C. FIG.
In the chance-up meter effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 109A, a chance-up meter image I2A, a timer image I2G, and a button image I2E are displayed. The chance-up meter image I2A and the button image I2E are the same as in FIG. 108(A), so the description is omitted. The timer image I2G is displayed while the chance-up meter image I2A is being displayed. For example, the timer image I2G is displayed at the start of the chance-up meter effect or at a predetermined timing after the chance-up indication image I2A2 is displayed. In the timer image I2G, the timer value is displayed in a count-up manner, and 0 second is set as the initial value of the timer.

Next, the timing match display effect shown in FIG. 109(B) or the timing mismatch display effect shown in FIG. 109(D) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 109B, in the timing coincidence display effect, when the timer value of the timer image I2G reaches a predetermined value (for example, 15 seconds), the button image I2H is displayed. The button image I2H is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in the valid operation period. Specifically, the button image I2H is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image representing a state in which the color of the button image I2E is darkened and/or a state in which the button image I2E is lit. is. Adjacent to the button image I2H, the characters “Press!!” are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63 .
In the timing matching display effect, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timing at which the timer value of the timer image I2G becomes a predetermined value and the button image I2H is displayed. matches.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(C), a high expectation chance-up effect is executed. In the high-expectation-level chance-up effect, the high-expectation-level chance-up image I2C is displayed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 by displaying the button image I2H. The high-expectation chance-up image I2C is an image suggesting that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, similar to FIG. 107(C).

On the other hand, in the timing mismatch effect shown in FIG. 109(D), button image I2H is displayed when the timer value of timer image I2G reaches a predetermined value (for example, 15 seconds) as in FIG. 109(B). In the timing mismatch display effect, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timing at which the timer value of the timer image I2G becomes a predetermined value and the button image I2H is displayed. does not match.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(E), a low-expectation chance-up effect is executed. In the low-expectation chance-up presentation, a low-expectation chance-up image I2D is displayed. The low-expectation chance-up image I2D is an image suggesting that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, similar to FIG. 107(E).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the chance-up meter effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured such that timer display (display of timer image) is executed while the chance-up meter image I2A is being displayed (chance-up meter effect). ing. According to this configuration, a display dealing with two different types of time is provided, so that the player can have a sense of anticipation as time passes. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image reach a predetermined value. A high-expectation chance-up effect or a low-expectation chance-up effect may be executed based on the timing to become. According to this configuration, the high-expectation chance-up effect can be executed based on the displays dealing with two different kinds of times, so that the player can have a greater sense of anticipation due to the progress of these displays. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image reach a predetermined value. When the timing coincides, the high-expectation chance-up effect may be executed. According to this configuration, when the displays dealing with two different types of time are synchronized, the high-expectation chance-up effect can be executed, so that the player can have a greater sense of anticipation due to the progression of these displays. can. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image reach a predetermined value. When the timing does not match, the low-expectation chance-up effect may be executed. According to this configuration, when the displays dealing with two different types of time are not synchronized, the low-expectation chance-up effect can be executed, so that the player can have a greater sense of anticipation due to the progression of these displays. can be done. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, when the timer value of the timer image I2G reaches a predetermined value in the timing matching display effect or the timing mismatching display effect, the player is prompted to press the effect button 63. is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a real feeling of having participated in the game, and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
A modification of the chance-up meter effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
As shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the game machine 1 of the above embodiment executes the chance-up meter display and the timer display, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a chance up meter display and other displays representing the passage of time may be performed. Here, other displays representing the passage of time may be, for example, meters or indicators representing time.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, in the timing matching display effect, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timing in the timer image The high-expectation chance-up effect is executed when the timer value reaches the predetermined value, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the timings match, various effects such as a simulated continuous effect, an effect indicating the type of ready-to-win effect, and an announcement suggesting development to a super ready-to-win effect may be executed. In this case, an effect different from these effects may be executed after the timing mismatch display effect. In this case as well, the performance to be executed when the timings match is selected as a performance with a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the performance to be executed when the timings do not match.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, in the timing mismatch display effect, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timing in the timer image Although the low-expectation chance-up effect is executed when the timing at which the timer value reaches the predetermined value does not match, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the timings do not match, various effects such as pseudo-continuous effects, effects indicating the type of ready-to-win effect, and advance notice suggesting that the game will develop into a super ready-to-win effect may be executed. In this case, an effect different from these effects may be executed after the timing matching display effect. In this case as well, the performance to be executed when the timings do not match is selected as a performance with a lower degree of expectation than the performance to be performed when the timings match.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the chance-up meter effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more timer images may be displayed simultaneously. may

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the high-expectation chance-up image I2C and the low-expectation chance-up image I2D are used as the chance-up effect to suggest the chance-up. It is not limited. For example, as a chance increase, the degree of expectation for the jackpot is specifically displayed (such as "Expectation 50%!"), the color is used to indicate the degree of expectation for the jackpot, the sound is used to indicate the degree of expectation for the jackpot, A predetermined character may be displayed to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect I2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
one of the plurality of types of display is a first period display;
one of the plurality of types of display is a second period display;
one of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display;
The first period display is a display that may be displayed during a certain period of the period during which the ready-to-win effect display is performed,
The first period display is a display including a cursor display,
The cursor display moves from the start position to the end position through a specific position to represent the start to end of the certain period,
The first period display is a display including a specific position display that notifies the specific position,
The movement of the cursor display from the start position to the specific position represents a period from the start of the certain period to a first timing,
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may start during the display of the ready-to-win effect display,
The second period display may be performed during the first period display,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I2-2]
one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display different from the first effect display;
The second period display is a timer display,
When the second period display is performed during the first period display, the second effect is generated based on the first timing and the second timing when the timer display reaches a predetermined value. may perform display,
The gaming machine according to aspect I2-1, characterized by:
[Aspect I2-3]
When the second period display is executed during the first period display, and the first timing coincides with a second timing at which the timer display reaches a predetermined value, the first period display is performed. The second effect display may be executed at the timing of
The gaming machine according to aspect I2-2, characterized by:
[Aspect I2-4]
When the second period display is executed during the first period display, if the first timing and the second timing at which the timer display reaches a predetermined value do not match, the The first effect display may be executed at a first timing,
The gaming machine according to mode I2-2 or mode I2-3, characterized by:
[Aspect I2-5]
The first effect display is a display including a first chance-up effect,
The second effect display is a display including a second chance-up effect in which the expectation of a big win is higher than that of the first chance-up effect.
The gaming machine according to any one of modes I2-2 to I2-4, characterized by:
[Aspect I2-6]
The second effect display is a effect with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the first effect display,
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 2 to 5, characterized by:
[Aspect 7]
one of the plurality of types of display is display of an operation unit image for prompting the player to operate the operation unit;
display of the operation unit image is executed when the timer display is executed;
The gaming machine according to any one of modes I2-1 to I2-6, characterized by:

The pending timer effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 110 to 112. FIG. This pending timer effect is during the variable effect of the decorative pattern (for example, at the start of the variable display of the special pattern, at the start of the variable effect of the decorative pattern, during the reach effect (super reach effect)), or during the jackpot game. can be performed. Note that the pending timer effects A and B are effects that can be executed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the pending timer effect C is an effect that can be executed with the fluctuations.

[Hold timer effect A]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the pending timer effect A. FIG.
In the pending timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 110(A), a pending icon I3 and a timer image I3C are displayed. The pending icons I3 are composed of a first pending icon I3B (maximum eight) representing pending and a second pending icon I3A representing the pending. In addition, in order to simplify the explanation, only the first reserved icons (maximum four) corresponding to the reserved special figure 1 are shown in the figure among the first reserved icons I3B. Accordingly, the first pending icon I3B in the figure corresponds to the pending image 9A. Hereinafter, the pending timer effect will be shown in the same way.

The timer image I3C is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. The timer image I3C shown in FIG. 110A shows 15 seconds as the timer initial value. This timer image I3C is displayed adjacently so as to be associated with the specific first pending icon I3B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(B), a timeout display effect is executed. In this timeout display effect, the first hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C is shifted to the right by one as the hold is shifted, and then the timer value of the timer image I3C is set to 0 seconds. be. It should be noted that the top right of FIG. 110(B) shows that the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, that is, all the decorative designs are changing. In the following, if there is no particular need for such a state, the description will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(C), a pending change display effect is executed. In this pending change display effect, the color of the first pending icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C is changed, and a character indicating "heat" is displayed on the pending icon. Thus, it can be suggested that the degree of expectation for a big win has increased in the variable effect corresponding to the first pending icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C. That is, the pending change display effect suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit of the variable effect corresponding to the first pending icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C.

[Hold timer effect B]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the pending timer effect B. FIG.
In the pending timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 111A, a pending icon I3 (a first pending icon I3B and a second pending icon I3A), a timer image I3C, and a button image I3D are displayed. The pending icon I3 and the timer image I3C are the same as in FIG. 110A, so descriptions thereof are omitted.
The button image I3D is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is anticipated that the effect using the effect button 63 will be executed from now on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(B), a timeout display effect is executed. In this time-out display effect, the first hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C is shifted to the right by one with the shift of the hold, and then the timer value of the timer image I3C becomes "0" seconds. executed.

Also, in the timeout display effect, the button image I3E is displayed. The button image I3E is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in the valid operation period. Specifically, the button image I3E is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image representing a state in which the color of the button image I3D is darkened and/or a state in which the button image I3D is lit. is. Adjacent to the button image I3E, the characters "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(C), a holding expectation degree suggestion effect is executed. In this pending expectation level suggestion effect, the pending expected level suggestion image I3F is displayed so as to correspond to the first pending icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C. The pending expectation degree suggesting image I3F suggests the jackpot expectation degree of the variable effect corresponding to the associated first pending icon I3B. The pending expectation degree suggestion image I3F is displayed using the same frame as the timer image I3C.

[Hold timer effect C]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the pending timer effect C. FIG.
In the hold timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 112A, a hold icon I3 (a first hold icon I3B and a second hold icon I3A), a timer image I3C, and a button image I3D are displayed. In this case, the timer image I3C is displayed adjacently so as to be associated with the second pending icon I3A. The functions of the pending icon I3, the timer image I3C, and the button image I3D are the same as in FIG. In addition, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are shown in this pending timer effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(B), a timeout display effect is executed. In this timeout display effect, the button image I3E is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 111(B), and the effect of setting the timer value of the timer image I3C to "0" seconds is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(C), a pseudo continuous effect is executed. In this pseudo-continuation effect, a pseudo-continuation suggestive image I3G is displayed so as to correspond to the second pending icon I3A associated with the timer image I3C. The pseudo-continuous suggestive image I3G suggests that the pseudo-continuous effect is being executed in the variable effect (the variable effect) corresponding to the associated second pending icon I3A, and the number of times of the pseudo-continuous effect. . The pseudo-continuation suggestive image I3G is displayed using the same frame as the timer image I3C.

The pseudo-continuous effect is a effect that is executed at the start of the variable change or during the ready-to-win effect. An effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part, an effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping a predetermined logo, or a display reminiscent of a pseudo-continuation such as “x2”, “x3”, “pseudo”, Including the effect to execute the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending timer effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and a predetermined effect (hold icon I3) is displayed based on the timer value of the timer image I3C. A change display effect, a pending expectation degree suggesting effect, or a pseudo-continuous effect) is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the hold, and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in correspondence, and based on the timer value of the timer image I3C, the timer image I3C is associated with the timer image I3C. A predetermined effect (a pending change display effect, a pending expectation degree suggesting effect, or a pseudo-continuous effect) is executed for the suspended icon I3. According to this configuration, the player's interest can be more attracted to the specific hold, and as a result, the amusement can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed adjacent to each other. According to this configuration, the player can quickly recognize the correspondence between the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3, and the player's interest in the specific hold can be increased. As a result, interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in correspondence, and based on the timer value of the timer image I3C, the timer image I3C is associated with the timer image I3C. An effect (a pending change display effect or a pending expectation degree suggesting effect) of suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win is executed for the pending icon I3 thus obtained. According to this configuration, since an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win is executed for the pending icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C, the player's interest can be further deepened, and as a result, Interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other. A pending change display effect is executed for the icon I3. According to this configuration, the mode of the pending icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C changes, so that the player's interest can be deepened, and as a result, the amusement can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and the timer value of the timer image I3C becomes a predetermined value (0 seconds). In this case, a predetermined effect (a hold change display effect, a hold expectation degree suggesting effect, or a pseudo continuous effect) is executed for the hold icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C. According to this configuration, until the timer value of the timer image I3C reaches the predetermined value, the player's interest can be attracted to the hold icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C, and as a result, the player's interest can be enhanced. can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 and 112, when the timer image I3C reaches a predetermined value (0 seconds), a button image I3E prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 is displayed. Then, when the player operates the production button 63, a predetermined production (holding expectation degree suggesting production or pseudo-continuous production) is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the effect button 63, improve the rate of participation in the game, and as a result improve the interest.

[Modification]
A modification of the pending timer effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image I3C may be displayed in a count-up manner in which the timer value is counted up. In this case, when a predetermined value is reached, the timeout display effect described above can be executed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the timer image I3C is displayed in association with the second hold icon I3A, and when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (0 seconds), a pseudo continuous effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other effects such as a pending change display effect as shown in FIG. An up effect may be executed.
Also, as shown in FIG. 110 or 111, a timer image I3C is displayed in association with the first hold icon I3B, and when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (0 seconds), a hold change display effect or a hold expectation degree suggestion effect is displayed. is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to execute other effects such as a pseudo-continuous effect, a chance-up effect, and the like.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C is displayed in association with the hold icon I3, and when the timer value reaches 0 seconds, a predetermined effect (hold change display effect, A pending expectation degree suggestive effect or a pseudo continuous effect) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image I3C may be displayed in association with the pending icon I3, and when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 7.77 seconds), a predetermined effect may be executed.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the pending timer effects A to C shown in FIGS. may be displayed at the same time.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pending timer effects A and B shown in FIGS. It is good also as production performed only by . In addition, although the pending timer effect C shown in FIG. 112 is an effect executed with the variation, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect may be executed over a plurality of variations.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect I3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of pending icons,
The pending icon includes an icon representing pending and an icon representing the pending,
It is configured to be able to notify the number of pending by the number of display of the pending icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of effects,
As one of the plurality of effects, a first effect may be performed,
As one of the plurality of effects, a second effect may be performed,
The first effect is a effect of displaying a timer,
A combined effect including the first effect and the second effect may be performed, and in the combined effect, the timer display of the first effect and the pending icon are displayed in association with each other, The second effect is performed based on the timer display of the first effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I3-2]
In the combination effect, the timer display of the first effect and the holding icon are displayed in association with each other, and based on the timer display, the holding icon associated with the timer display is displayed with the second display. A performance of
The gaming machine according to aspect I3-1, characterized by:
[Aspect I3-3]
In the combined effect, the timer display of the first effect and the pending icon are displayed adjacent to each other.
[Aspect I3-4] The gaming machine according to aspect I3-1 or aspect I3-2, characterized by
The second production is a production to perform a jackpot expectation degree suggestive display,
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 3, characterized by:
[Aspect I3-5]
The jackpot expectation degree suggestive display is a display that may change the mode of the pending icon,
The gaming machine according to mode I3-4, characterized by:
[Aspect I3-6]
In the combination effect, when the timer display of the first effect reaches a predetermined value, the second effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of modes I3-1 to I3-5, characterized by:
[Aspect I3-7]
Equipped with an operation unit that can be operated by a player,
In the combination effect, when the timer display of the first effect reaches a predetermined value, an operation unit image is displayed to prompt the player to operate the operation unit, and the player operates the operation unit. When the second production is performed,
The gaming machine according to any one of modes I3-1 to I3-6, characterized by:

113 to 115, the timer ball-out winning effect will be described below. This ball-out acquisition effect can be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols, for example, during a ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect). In particular, the timer ball-out acquisition effect can be executed at the final stage of the ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect).

[Timer ball acquisition effect A]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the timer ball-out winning effect A. FIG.
In the timer ball-out acquisition effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 113(A), a big hit notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, a jackpot pattern arrangement using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is shown. In FIG. 113(A), the jackpot pattern arrangement is a series of 7 patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(B), a timer display effect is executed. In the timer display effect, a timer image I4A and an ally character CRA are displayed. The timer image I4A is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. The timer image I4A shown in FIG. 113B shows "5 seconds" as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(C), the scheduled payout ball display effect is executed. In the scheduled payout ball display performance, when the timer value of the timer image I4A reaches 0 second, the scheduled payout number suggestion image I4B is displayed. The planned payout ball number suggestion image I4B is an image that suggests the jackpot number of balls to be paid out in the jackpot game. In the example of FIG. 113(C), the scheduled payout number suggestion image I4B indicates that 1500 payout balls can be paid out during the jackpot game.

[Timer Ball Acquisition Production B]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the timer ball-out winning effect B. FIG.
In the timer ball-out acquisition effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 114(A), a big hit notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, a jackpot pattern arrangement using decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is shown as in FIG. 113(A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(B), a timer display effect is executed. In the timer display effect, similarly to FIG. 113B, the timer image I4A and teammate character CRA are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(C), a button pressing promotion display effect is executed. In this button pressing promotion display effect, the timer value of the timer image I4A becomes "0 seconds" and the button image I4C is displayed. The button image I4C is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in the valid operation period. Specifically, the button image I4C is an image representing a state as if "PUSH" is displayed in the image and is lit. Adjacent to the button image I4C, the characters "PUSH!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(D), the scheduled payout ball display effect is executed. In this scheduled payout ball display effect, when the player presses the effect button 63, the expected payout number suggestion image I4B is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 113(C).

[Timer ball acquisition effect C]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the timer ball-out winning effect C. As shown in FIG.
In the timer ball-out acquisition effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 115(A), a big hit notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, a jackpot pattern arrangement using decorative patterns is shown as in FIG. 113(A).

Next, the timer display effect (large timer initial value) shown in FIG. 115(B) or the timer display effect (small timer initial value) shown in FIG. 115(E) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 115B, in the timer display effect (large timer initial value), a timer image I4D of "15 seconds" with a relatively large timer initial value is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(C), a button pressing promotion display effect is executed. In this button pressing promotion display effect, the timer value of the timer image I4D becomes "0 seconds", and the button image I4C is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 114(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(D), the scheduled payout ball display effect is executed. As in FIG. 114(D), in this scheduled payout ball display presentation, when the player presses the presentation button 63, it is suggested that the number of expected payout balls to be paid out is 1500, which is relatively large. A scheduled payout number suggestion image I4B is displayed.

On the other hand, in the timer display effect (timer initial value small) shown in FIG. 115(E), a timer image I4A with a relatively small timer initial value of "5 seconds" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115(F), a button pressing promotion display effect is executed. In this button pressing promotion display effect, the timer value of the timer image I4A becomes "0 seconds" and the button image I4C is displayed, as in FIG. 114(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(G), the scheduled payout ball display effect is executed. In this scheduled payout ball display effect, when the player presses the performance button 63, a scheduled payout ball number suggestion image I4E indicating that the number of expected payout balls to be paid out is relatively small, 700 balls, is displayed. is displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer ball-out acquisition effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, timer images I4A and I4C are displayed, and projected payout number suggesting images I4B and I4E are displayed. According to this configuration, the timer display is performed before the scheduled payout number suggestive display is executed, so that the player's interest in the expected payout number of balls to be paid out can be enhanced. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, timer images I4A and I4C are displayed, and after the timer value reaches 0 second, images I4B and I4E indicating the number of projected balls to be paid out are displayed. be done. According to this configuration, when the timer value reaches 0 seconds, the number of balls to be paid out is displayed, so that the player's interest in the number of balls to be paid out can be further enhanced. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the timer images I4A and I4C are displayed, and the button image I4C prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, images I4B and I4E indicating the number of balls to be paid out are displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a real feeling of having participated in the game, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 115, when the timer display effect is executed in the timer ball acquisition effect C, when the timer image I4D with the relatively large timer initial value is displayed, is larger than when the timer image I4A with a relatively small timer initial value is displayed. . According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the timer display before the image indicating the number of balls to be paid out is displayed. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the timer ball-out obtaining effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the button image I4C is displayed after the timer values of the timer images I4A and I4D become 0 seconds in the button pressing promotion display effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the button image I4C may be configured to be displayed when the timer values of the timer images I4A and I4D reach a predetermined value (for example, 2 seconds) before reaching 0 seconds.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the timer ball winning effect shown in FIGS. 113 to 115 is at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, during the variable effect of the decorative symbol, or during the ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer display effect, the button pressing promotion effect, and the scheduled payout ball display effect among the timer ball-out acquisition effects may be configured to be executed during the jackpot game.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer ball winning effect shown in FIGS. A timer image may be displayed at the same time.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, the timer images I4A and I4D are displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer values count down, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, the timer images I4A and I4D may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value is counted up. In this case, when a predetermined value is reached, the timeout display effect described above can be executed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect I4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
one display of the plurality of types of display is a certain display;
The certain display is a display performed when winning a jackpot lottery,
The certain indication may be displayed in the first aspect,
The certain indication may be displayed in a second manner,
The first aspect is an aspect including a timer display,
The second aspect is an aspect including a planned payout number indication display that suggests the number of game media to be paid out during a jackpot game based on the jackpot,
The certain display is a display that may be displayed in the second mode after being displayed in the first mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I4-2]
The certain display is displayed in the second mode after the timer value of the timer display reaches a first predetermined value in the first mode.
The gaming machine according to aspect I4-1, characterized by:
[Aspect I4-3]
Equipped with an operation unit that can receive a player's operation and execute a predetermined effect by the player's operation,
The certain display may be displayed in a third aspect,
The third aspect is an aspect including display of an operation unit image prompting the player to operate the operation unit,
The certain display is displayed in the first mode, is displayed in the third mode while being displayed in the first mode, and then the player operates the operation unit. Depending on, it may be displayed in the second mode,
The gaming machine according to aspect I4-1 or aspect I4-2, characterized by:
[Aspect I4-4]
The certain display is displayed in the first mode, displayed in the third mode before the timer value in the first mode reaches a second predetermined value, and then is operated by the player. Depending on the operation of the part, it may be displayed in the second mode,
The gaming machine according to aspect I4-3, characterized by:
[Aspect I4-5]
In the first aspect, the initial value of the timer value may be a first value and a second value larger than the first value,
When the certain display is displayed in the first mode and then displayed in the second mode, when the initial value of the timer value in the first mode is the second value reduces the number of game media to be paid out indicated by the indication of the number of expected payouts in the second mode, as compared with the case where the initial value of the timer value in the first mode is the first value; a large value,
The gaming machine according to any one of modes I4-1 to I4-4, characterized by:

[Other Modifications]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type game machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the game machine 1 is a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from game balls to game medals.

The gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is provided with the effect button 63 as an operation unit to be operated by the player, but is not limited to this. good too. Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the button image representing the effect button 63 may be used to execute the display effect. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the timer value of the timer image is used as the timer display to indicate the time, but the timer display is not limited to this, and the timer display may be a meter method or an indicator method.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine without a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

In addition, among the plurality of production examples and/or modifications described above, two or more production examples and/or modifications may be combined. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub-display device in addition to the image display device 7 . In this case, the display effects described above may be executed by the sub-display device.

The present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, but the above-described embodiments are intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and modified without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Game machine 3... Game area 7... Image display device (display means)
7a... Display screen 9A, 9B, 9C... Reserved icon 15... Board movable body 63... Production button (operation means)
64... Sword member (operating means)
65... Sword button (operating means)
68... Select button (operating means)
81... Game control microcomputer 91... Production control microcomputer 101... Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of pending icons and decorative patterns,
one of the first display and the second display can be displayed in each display area where each pending icon is displayed;
In the display area where the first display is displayed, the hold icon can be displayed on the first image ,
In the display area where the second display is displayed, the holding icon becomes invisible due to a second image different from the decorative pattern,
After the holding icon is displayed in a normal manner without prefetching effects in each of the plurality of display areas where the first display is displayed, one of the plurality of display areas is displayed. When the display is switched from the first display to the second display, the outer shapes of the first image and the pending icon are both deformed and displayed, and then the second image changes the pending icon. becomes invisible and the first display is continuously displayed in other display regions of the plurality of display regions;
After the first effect, the display of the display area switched to the second display is switched from the second display to the first display, and a special mode in which the invisible pending icon is prefetched. and a second effect that is displayed again as .

Images